JP6745570B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

As a game machine, a game ball as a game medium is driven into a game area formed on the front surface of the game board, and the display device is based on that the driven game ball wins a starting opening provided in the game area (for example, , A liquid crystal display device) performs variable display of symbols and the like, and when a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, there is one that controls to a jackpot gaming state that gives a predetermined profit to the player (for example, Patent Document 1) .

JP, 2011-115496, A

By the way, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a demand for a new winning opening unit provided in the game area, which suppresses a decrease in amusement of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in amusement of the game.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, in the invention of claim 1, a game board on the front side of which game balls can flow down, and a winning unit having a winning opening which is provided on the game board and into which the game balls can enter. In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning opening is opened and closed by an opening and closing member that switches between an open state and a closed state,
On the front side of the ball entering unit, a cover portion that forms a game area as a back area is provided,
Distribution guide means for guiding the distribution of the game balls is provided on the board surface side of the cover portion,
As the distribution guide means, a branch portion having an inclined surface provided as an immovable fixed member for branching the flow path of the game ball and rolling the game ball toward the winning opening is provided, and by the branch portion, The game ball is branched into a first flow path that can flow through the winning port and a second flow path that does not flow through the winning port.
Through the cover portion, it is possible to visually recognize a game ball circulating on the board surface side of the cover portion,
No game nail is provided on the board surface side of the cover part, and the distribution of the game balls is guided only by the distribution guide means.
When the game ball that has reached the inclined surface of the branching part rolls on the inclined surface toward the winning opening, the opening member is always closed to the winning opening when the opening and closing member is in the closed state. If it is not accepted and the opening and closing member is in the open state, it is always guided to the winning opening,
The entrance width of the second flow path branched by the branch portion is a width that allows only one game ball to pass through, and can be distributed to the winning opening rather than the entrance width of the second flow path that does not flow to the winning opening. The inlet width of the first flow path is formed larger,
The branch portion is a "ball flow that allows a game ball to flow down on the right side of a center character provided at an upstream side of the branch portion with a width that allows only one game ball to flow down, and which is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game board. A gaming machine characterized by branching a game ball flowing down a "road" into the first flow path or the second flow path.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of games.

It is a perspective view showing a state where the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 6 is a perspective view for explaining a structure for attaching and detaching the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame and seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame and seen from behind. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and showed the handle apparatus in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the ball feed unit and was seen from the front. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case removed. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening and closing unit in the body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen after. It is a perspective view explaining an operation of a standing wall part of a power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, which is disassembled and seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding lever for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was seen after. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like as seen from the front. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 103. FIG. 104 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 taken in the vertical direction. It is a partial sectional view showing a crime prevention structure on the pivotal support side of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state where the game board was stored in the body frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the front view of the game board which makes the second attacker unit easy to see. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally backward. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from the back diagonally. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in the game board from the back. It is a perspective view of an attacker unit. It is the perspective view which looked at an attacker unit from the lower back. (A) It is a front view of an attacker unit, (b) is a BB sectional view in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the projection area|region by the projector unit of an attacker unit. (A) is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit which is disassembled and seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the front left movable production unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the table left movable production unit. It is a front view of a center accessory. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is a front view which expands and shows the 2nd attacker unit in a center accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of a 2nd attacker unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front right movable production unit in the center accessory and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the front right movable production unit in a center accessory, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the front right movable production unit in a center accessory. It is a front view of the back unit in the game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main component and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main component and it looked at after. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball guide unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball guide unit from the back. It is a front view of the back inside movable effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which saw the back inside movable production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back inside movable production unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of the main production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is a disassembled oblique view of the rear middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the back inside drive mechanism in the back inside movable effect unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back inside drive mechanism in the back inside movable effect unit from the back. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the drive mechanism in the back for each main member that is disassembled and seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back inside drive mechanism for every main member and saw it after. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back inside movable production unit. It is a front view of a back-up rear movable effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back movable production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper back movable production unit into the arm slide unit and the arm unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back movable production unit into the arm slide unit and the arm unit, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm slide unit of the back upper back movable production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm slide unit of the back upper back movable production unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm unit of the back upper back movable production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm unit of the back upper back movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm unit of the back upper back movable production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm unit of the back upper back movable production unit and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper arm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the upper arm unit of the arm unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the forearm unit of the arm unit as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the forearm unit of the arm unit, which is disassembled and seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement by the arm slide unit in a back upper movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement by the arm unit in a back upper movable production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper front movable production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper front movable production unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of the front upper movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view of the rear upper movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movement of the back front movable production unit. It is an explanatory view showing a relation between a back-up front movable production unit and a back-up rear movable production unit in the back unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the back-up front movable production unit and the back-up rear movable production unit following FIG. 174. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower back movable production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which saw the back lower back movable production unit from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit disassembled into a rear-bottom rear decorative body unit, an elevating unit, and the like as seen from the front. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower back movable effect unit disassembled into a rear lower back decorative body unit, an elevating unit, and the like as seen from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower back decoration body unit of the back lower back movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side back decorative body unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back lower back decoration body unit. It is a perspective view showing a schematic structure of an elevating unit in a rear lower movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back lower back movable production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower back front movable production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which saw the back lower front movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower movable production unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower front movable production unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back lower movable production unit. It is a perspective view showing a back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back left movable production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back left movable production unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of one movable unit in a back left movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back left movable production unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process performed periodically by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the special design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about production pre-determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a pre-determination table used for the production pre-determination process, and (B) is a table for details of the types of pre-reading determined by the pre-determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, (C) is a lottery processing for types of jackpots It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16ms steady-state processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of a melody reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a melody reach. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a melody reach.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame forming the pachinko machine as seen from the rear, and FIG. 7 is the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board forming the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front.

1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and an outer frame 2 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable and the front side is opened. A box frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which game balls as a game medium are driven, a front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It is provided with a door frame 5 rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. On the door frame 5 of this pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 is visible from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. It is provided with a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the pachinko machine 1 has a horizontal direction. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

In this pachinko machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 is projected to the front side below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can operate the handle device 500 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength according to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. The player cannot insert his or her hand into the game area 1100 to touch the game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, prizes, or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment/detachment structure of the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. .. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 form the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and are substantially vertically centered at the left and right ends. An engaging cutout portion 15 is provided that penetrates through and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, a mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, an aluminum alloy), the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end portion. The projection 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of vertically extending grooves are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, a worker's The pachinko machine 1 becomes a finger rest so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held, and the design of the appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are left-right asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw is passed through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to an upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame board 10 and a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame board 12 so as to face the upper support fitting 20. And a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower metal supporting member 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal member 22. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front side of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projecting piece. A supporting hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20 and the supporting projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b (FIG. 14), and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. A shaft hook pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support member 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support member 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is enhanced by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b, and the details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. In addition, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protruding piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed to the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-like support protrusion 21c protruding from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front side of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support protrusion piece 21c. And a support protrusion 21d. A main body frame shaft support formed on a main body frame shaft support metal member 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal member 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-back direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the engagement between the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 is released by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. This guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by the rivet 28. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operating portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the drawing, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

As shown in FIG. 14(B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state of being supported by the supporting projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so as to close the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space part of the support hook hole 20c. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a of the stopper portion 27a is formed. A state in which the side of the leading end faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the side of the leading end of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, which is the same), the axial support pin 633 and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, which are located in the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending, respectively. The centers are offset from each other in an oblique direction and face each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the above, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. Since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, the lock member 27 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. Has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the axial support pin 633 acts on the arcuate tip surface 27d by exerting the acting force F in the direction of slipping out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the shaft support pin 633 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, and the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is separated. A moment for rotating the tip end portion from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise direction in the drawing) does not act, and the shaft support pin 633 causes the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side is retained. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded, even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction (clockwise in the drawing) away from the support protrusion piece 20b, one side of the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is rotated. Is abutted against the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in the direction of further disengagement, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b.

Even if the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support projection piece 20b or the position where no rotation moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock is performed. The present applicant has pointed out that the locking member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b because only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm confirming.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivot support fitting 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed in, thereby As shown in FIG. 16(B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the pivot pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16(C). Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during a normal opening/closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16(E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Then, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily nail the nails, and the present pachinko machine 1 can be easily applied to existing island equipment. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light-weight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, the wall thickness can be reduced while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed at the same time as the main body frame 3 can be mounted.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is fixedly attached to the outer surface and the connecting member 14 is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in an engaged state, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can have a rectangular frame shape. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, Adjacent ball lending machine) can be attached closely.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right side. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the left front side, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the right rear side. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the back. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view.

The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has, as shown in the figure, a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer circumference, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower end lower side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 arranged and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 is a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. Attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. And a glass unit 590 that is operated.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows a wiring state for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is an enlarged perspective view.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a game window 101 formed in a vertically long rectangular outer shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically elongated substantially elliptical inner periphery. A frame base main body 110, an upper bracket 120 mounted on the front center of the door frame base main body 110 in the upper center of the game window 101 for fixing an upper decoration unit, and a lower end left and right of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110. A pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110, and a front surface of the door frame base main body 110 mounted on the lower right corner in front view. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

The door frame base unit 100 has, on the outside of the right side speaker 130 in front view, a side surface of the side speaker 130 and a front side of a wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like. And a cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24, etc.). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and hold the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. You can do it.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower part of the game window 101 with the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the left-right direction in rear view (open side) ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. The handle device relay substrate 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192, and the firing cover 191 sandwiching the center in the left-right direction. A door frame base substrate 194 that is arranged on the side opposite to the handle device relay substrate 192 and the like (on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear (on the side of the pivotal support)) and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body, A door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of 194, and a part of a wiring cord 196 that is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 and that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side. And a wiring holding member 197 for holding the wiring.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the whole is improved by fixing the reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it is strong enough to support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like.

The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to each speaker 130. In the present example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative units 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring cord 196 connecting the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like with the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control section 4140, and the like is the right side (the axis) of the door frame base board 194 in a rear view. After being bundled together in the position of the (support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape, and penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the inner shape is vertically long. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a cutout portion of a rectangular shape 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Are formed. This door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view. Therefore, a wider area of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 can be easily formed as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is like this.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is provided on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, and a ball feeding unit 580 for mounting and fixing. For the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28), the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 of the dish unit 300 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 that is obliquely inclined so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that is arranged in the lower right corner in front view and bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, a wire passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass, and a tubular shape that extends shortly forward toward the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. A lock hole 116 formed and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted is provided.

As shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in rear view. From the board mounting portion 118 arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and from the arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101. The security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180, and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side along the inner circumference of the game window 101 on the rear side, and the glass unit 590. Glass unit supporting step 110a that can contact the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the game window 101, and four locking member attachments for projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 to rotatably support the glass unit locking member 190 And a section 110b.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c which projects rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is an engaging groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire will be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even in this case, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, etc. on the front surface thereof. In addition, many mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140, etc. are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h (see FIGS. 18, 24 and 24) for mounting the side speaker cover 290. 25, etc.) are respectively formed at appropriate positions.

In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right glass units 590 are arranged so as to penetrate through the glass unit supporting step 110a into which the glass units 590 are fitted from the rear side, respectively. With the glass unit 590 removed from 110 (door frame 5), it can be attached and detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to cover the rear side by fixing the security cover 180 to the door frame base body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, first, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must be removed from the door frame base body 110. As a result, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed for a while so that a person who intends to commit an illegal act can take time to remove the side speaker cover 290, and the relatively large glass unit 590 is removed. By doing so, the dismounting work can be made conspicuous, and the deterrent power (safety) against the misconduct or the like can be enhanced by hesitating to the theft act on the side speaker 130 or the misconduct to the inside of the game area 1100 or the like. Has become.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the center of the upper front surface of the door frame base body 110. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is hidden, and the left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. Further, a part of the tip of the upper bracket 120 is inserted into the upper decoration unit 280, and when the door frame 5 is assembled, the upper decoration unit 280 can be supported from above. It is like this.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 has a center axis intersecting at a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). It is fixed diagonally so as to be at a position of 0.5 m) so that the sound can be delivered to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is arranged in a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible, and the left and right sides are arranged. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output sounds with a high sense of stereo.

The outer periphery of each of the side speakers 130 is clamped by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby a door frame is formed. It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened, and the rear side of the rear side has a vertical direction. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center of the. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape that extends long in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the present example, three in the vertical direction) at predetermined intervals at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 is vertically aligned with the step 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. Although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported about the extended axis, and the wiring holding member 197 is rotated by the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

The wiring holding member 197 is bundled in a predetermined manner in upper and lower holding holes 197a with a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface thereof. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotated in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side becomes free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is in a state of being folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other. Therefore, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves in the direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported moves the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since the rear surface is pivotally supported, and a part of the wiring cord 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, and the like due to being pinched or pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when force is applied via the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, The wiring cord 196 can be securely folded in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a problem, because the vertical movement can be made less likely to occur.

Furthermore, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a bridge between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and a main control board 4100, a peripheral control section 4140, a payout control board 4110, etc. as main body side electric devices, and the door side. A defect occurs in the wiring 196 that connects the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, the speakers 130, 222, 262, the ball rental unit 360, the handle device 500, and the like as electrical devices. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of damage as much as possible.

In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Since the force can be released by the wiring, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled and causing a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, a conventional wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-213675) is used. The wiring 196 does not slide like the above), and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Furthermore, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a penetrating through the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from dropping from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position apart from the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring holding member 197 causes the wiring 196 to move the wiring 196. Since it is possible to favorably prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened/closed by being guided, the main body frame 3 in which the strength/rigidity of the side of the door frame 5 on which the pivot is supported is increased. The door frame 5 can be used as the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention property against illegal acts can be obtained.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the projecting ridges projecting at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the wiring by the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. It is possible to surround the three sides of 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 can be prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wire holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the body frame 3 in the wire 196 extends. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. A pantograph-shaped link is formed by the axial center of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, so wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 is performed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acts on the wiring 196, etc. to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back along the wiring holding member 197 at the tip end side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3, A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since the wiring holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, the wiring holding member 197 can be almost prevented from protruding from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring 196 can be compactly assembled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught by another member and prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to surely achieve the effect described above. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. Can be held to hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100, and the pachinko machine 1 having the large game board 4 which can attract the player's attention strongly can be provided. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 that extends outward in the right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges that project into the tubular portion 141 and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although illustration is omitted, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when mounted on the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attaching portion 114 that is inclined, so that the axis of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted in the same manner.

Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 27 and 28, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110 It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 that is attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in an upper surface and a lower surface thereof on upper and lower end portions of a shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 bent forward (see FIG. 27) and an upper bent protrusion 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the upper long side edge. , A vertical bending protrusion 161 which is bent rearward and is vertically extended at the center of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the rear surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is provided with a cutout 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout 101a of the door frame base body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 that are bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. The opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 is formed so that the opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the opening-side outer bending protrusion 163 as shown in the figure. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 described later is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side (FIG. 106). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long side thereof.

Since the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform the action, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example is provided with the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. (See 106), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, prevent only the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 from bending, and enhance the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent illegal tools from entering the game board 4. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side part thereof has an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. The contact recess 181 is formed, and the crime prevention rear projection 182 projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting rearward along the end shape thereof are respectively provided. Note that the rear-end crime prevention rear end projection 183 on the right side (the pivot side) in the rear view is extended rearward longer than the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front projection 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right outside the crime prevention front projection 184 are provided. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front projection 184 is adapted to fit with the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 contacts the vertical bending protrusion 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4, and the half open side thereof is forward. The component member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. ..

Note that the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the guide passage for the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the back surface thereof closed with the door frame 5 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses through the guide passage portion.

Thus, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are connected from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to carry out a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the invasion of the tool, and thus fraudulent acts. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more safe against such problems.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b that extends in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locks the locking projection piece 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a retaining screw to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and this ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating. Note that, of the four glass unit locking members 190, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right when viewed from the rear has no ridge, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit after disassembling it.

As shown, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outer side is linearly formed while being formed in an arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 forming a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 arranged along an upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side and the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208, a side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210. , Are provided.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the right side decoration. A board 214; and a right side lower decorative board 216 arranged below the substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 212 and having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof. A right side upper decorative board cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and a right side that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216. The right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 216.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 arranged in an upper left portion in a front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to a rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202, and a side sub-lens 228 attached from inside to a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208 are provided. There is. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 is arranged, and the LED 214c is adapted to emit light.

In this right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a non-translucent member, and a side decoration. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decoration lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub-lens 228 of the right side decoration unit 200 are translucent members. And the side upper cover 208 is substantially transparent, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub-lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

Although not shown in detail, the rear surfaces of the substantially transparent side lenses 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 and the front surfaces of the side inner lenses 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedron shape. , Is capable of irregularly refracting light. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 are game machines. It cannot be clearly seen from the person's side. Further, the front surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right-side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right-side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. The decoration boards 214, 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b are made to emit light as appropriate, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 202a, and a linear shape that extends from the lower end to the upper part and is located along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) at a position separated from the inner frame 202a to the outside, and continues to the upper part. An outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to curve toward the upper edge of the inner frame 202a, an upper frame 202c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, and an outer frame 202b and an inner frame. The lower end frame 202d that connects the lower end edges of the inner frame 202a to each other and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b are arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. A partition wall frame 202f having a slit 202e having a predetermined width is provided.

The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is linearly formed at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the front end is vertically movable. Are formed in an arc shape so that both ends thereof project forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion of the outer frame 202b above the linearly extending vertically is formed in an arcuate shape which is also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper edge side projects forward. Further, the partition wall frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b projects most forward. The partition wall frame 202f is arranged on the radiation radially extending from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 has a configuration in which a space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 202f, and each of the divided portions is divided. Is an emission decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the partition wall frame 202f can partition the slit 202e and the light-emission decoration opening 202g so that the respective light-emission modes can be made different.

As shown in the drawing, the upper side decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and also on the rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 has a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a row.

On the other hand, the side upper decoration lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decoration member 204, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decoration member 204 through the opening 204a to the vicinity of the front end thereof. It is provided with a plurality of light guide portions 206a that can project. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedron tip, and by inserting and fitting the light guide portion 206a into the opening portion 204a of the side upper decoration member 204, it is possible to make it look like a jewel is being fitted into the opening portion 204a. You can do it. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 204 can be emitted forward (on the player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. At the same time, the tip of the light guide portion 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

The upper side surface and the right side surface (in a front view) of the side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 have a shape substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and the lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along with the side upper decoration member 204. The side upper cover 208 has a mounting step portion 208a that is open downward and is recessed rearward so that the side upper decoration member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front surface. Mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the side upper decorative members 204 and the like are formed on the end faces. Further, on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, two notch portions 208b arranged vertically are formed, so that the side sub-lens 228 mounted inside through the notch portions 208b can be seen to the front side. Is becoming By fitting the side sub-lens 228 into the cutout portion 208b of the side upper cover 208, it is possible to emit light only in this portion in a different manner.

The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape that is substantially along with the side decoration frame 202 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emission decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. The peripheral lens part 210a and the radiation lens part 210b to be inserted into the slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include a peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. The storage step portion 210c has been formed. An upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like, which will be described later, are housed in the housing step 210c. The side lens 210 also includes a mounting portion 210d that forms the upper surface of the housing step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 208a of the side upper cover 208.

The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202. Although not shown in detail, the back surface (inner surface) side of the circumferential lens portion 210a is formed into a polyhedron by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the circumferential lens portion 210a has a non-uniform plate thickness. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens section 210a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron allows the peripheral lens portion 210a to exhibit a glittering characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and as shown in the figure, corresponds to a portion of the side lens 210 where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are formed. Is formed in such a manner that the rear surface is depressed, and the main body 212a is continuous with the rear end of the main body 212a and protrudes forward of the main body 212a, and corresponds to the emission lens 210b (slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202). And a plate-shaped light guide portion 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed such that the front surface thereof is a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Although not shown in detail, one surface of the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 has a polyhedral shape with a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. Since the plate portion of the main body 212a is formed unevenly, the light passing through the main body 212a is irregularly refracted.

By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be double-diffracted, and the shape of an object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. Almost unrecognizable. In addition, the irregular reflection and the polyhedral diffuse reflection make the side lens 210 (circumferential lens portion 210a) look shiny and make the perspective look unclear and strange.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and the light emission decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 (the circumference of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens part 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°), and the slits 202e of the side decoration frame 202 (of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens section 210b) are those having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°). The LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 that decorates the side sub-lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in this example.

Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. There is. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224, and the upper right speaker 222 is not seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in a front view. Has become.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, which is a noise for other pachinko machines. It's hard to come by. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is nonuniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted.

Further, the upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 202 so as to close the light emission decoration opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that the sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is nonuniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, light is irregularly refracted, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226. The outer appearance of the side lens 210 can be the same as that of the peripheral lens portion 210a.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. 34A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit after disassembling it.

The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view as shown in the figure, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outer side is linearly formed, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 is different from the side decoration frame 242 forming the skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, the side upper decoration member 244 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and the side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side and the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250. , Are provided.

The left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side upper decoration. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed on the lower side from substantially the vertical center of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) are mounted. A left side upper decoration board cover 258 which covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration board 254, and a left side which covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration board 256. The left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 is attached to the side lens 250 and the side decorative frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 arranged in an upper right portion in a front view of the side decoration frame 242, and an upper portion that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to a rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 242. A speaker bracket 264 and an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decorative frame 242 are provided.

In this left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration board cover 258, and a left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decoration member 244. Further, the side upper decoration lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decoration unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The substantially entire side upper cover 248 is milky white, and the side upper decoration lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

Although not shown in detail, the rear surfaces of the substantially transparent side lenses 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 and the front surfaces of the side inner lenses 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. , Is capable of irregularly refracting light. Therefore, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 are used as games. It cannot be clearly seen from the person's side. The front surfaces of the left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left-side decorative unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like. In addition, the decoration boards 254, 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are respectively connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Is appropriately emitted to allow the left side decoration unit 240 to emit light.

The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101. A circular arc-shaped inner frame 242a, and a straight line extending along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part, which is arranged at a position spaced apart from the inner frame 242a to the outside and continues to the upper part. The outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to curve toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper frame 242c connecting the upper frame edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, and the outer frame 242b and the inner frame. The lower end frame 242d that connects the lower end edges of the inner frame 242a and the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b are arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. A partition wall frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width.

The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, in the outer frame 242b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is linearly formed at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end thereof is vertical. Are formed in an arc shape so that both ends thereof project forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion of the outer frame 242b above the linearly extending vertically is formed in an arcuate shape that is also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side projects forward. Further, the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b projects most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation extending radially from the lower center of the game window 101 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 has a configuration in which a space between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 242f, and each of the divided portions is divided. Is an emission decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Further, the emission lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the partition frame 242f can partition the slit 242e and the light emission decoration opening 242g, so that the respective light emission modes can be made different.

As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arcuately extending upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242, and also has a rear surface. Are formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decoration member 244 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the opening 244a arranged in a row.

On the other hand, the side upper decoration lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decoration member 244, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decoration member 244 through the opening 244a to the vicinity of the front end thereof. It is provided with a plurality of light guide portions 246a that can project. The light guide portion 246a has a polyhedron tip, and by inserting and fitting the light guide portion 246a into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it is possible to make it look like a jewel is being fitted into the opening 244a. You can do it. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 can be emitted forward (on the player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide 246a can be made to shine as a jewel.

The side upper cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a top surface and a left side surface (in a front view) that are substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decoration member 244. The side upper cover 248 has a mounting step 248a that is open downward and is recessed rearward so that the side upper decoration member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front surface. Mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the side upper decorative members 244 and the like are formed on the end faces. In addition, the side upper cover 248 is provided with a covering portion 248b for covering the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side on the outer side surface (the left side surface when viewed from the front).

The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape that is substantially along with the side decoration frame 242 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emission decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 later. The peripheral lens part 250a and the radiation lens part 250b to be inserted into the slit 242e of the side decoration frame 242 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include a peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emission decoration opening 242g that contacts the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. The storage step portion 250c has been formed. An upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later, are housed in the housing step 250c. The side lens 250 also includes a mounting portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the housing step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 248a of the side upper cover 248.

The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition wall frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242. Although not shown in detail, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has an uneven plate thickness. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens section 250a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to have a characteristic appearance with a glitter.

The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the inside of the side lens 250 from the rear side, and as shown in the figure, corresponds to a portion of the side lens 250 where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are formed. Corresponding to the main body portion 252a having a recessed rear surface, which is continuous from the rear end of the main body portion 252a and protrudes further forward than the main body portion 252a, and the emission lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242). And a plate-shaped light guide portion 252b arranged at the above position. The body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface of the body portion 252a is a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Although not shown in detail, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 has a polyhedral shape with a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. Since the plate thickness of the main body 252a is not uniform, the light passing through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted.

By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens section 250a and the main body section 252a can be double-diffracted, and the shape of the object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. Almost unrecognizable. Further, due to the irregular reflection and the polyhedral diffuse reflection, the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) can be made to have a glittering appearance, and the perspective can be made to appear unclear and mysterious.

The left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and the side decoration frame 242 has a light emitting decoration opening 242g (a circumference of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens part 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°), and the slit 242e of the side decoration frame 242 (of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens section 250b) have relatively small irradiation angles (for example, 15° to 60°).

Like the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper end backside of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264 so that the upper left speaker 262 is not visible from the player side by the horn portion 264a in a front view. Has become.

The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, which is a noise for other pachinko machines. It's becoming difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces that face different directions, like the peripheral lens section 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body section 252a of the side inner lens 252. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is nonuniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted.

Further, the upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 242 so as to close the light emission decoration opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. In addition, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that the sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens section 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body section 252a of the side inner lens 252. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is nonuniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, light is irregularly refracted, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266. The outer appearance of the side lens 250 can be the same as that of the peripheral lens portion 250a.

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 on the center side. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the drawing, the upper decoration unit 280 has a generally outer isosceles triangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and a central opening 281a that greatly penetrates the center and both left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decoration member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the center opening 281a, and a rear side inside the center opening 281a of the front decoration member 281. The central lens 282 fitted from the front, the inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, the pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281, and the outer shape in front view are A main body member 285 that has a shape similar to that of the front decoration member 281, and is attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 281 so as to sandwich the central lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 with the front decoration member 281; An upper decoration substrate 286 arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285 and having a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the front surface, and an outer shape in a front view having substantially the same shape as the main body portion so as to cover the upper decoration substrate 286 from the rear side. And a substrate cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285.

Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is bent backward so as to be continuous from the lower end of the front decoration member 281, extends rearward, and has a front end upper portion supported by the front decoration member 281 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 and a lower portion. A lower surface decoration member 288 having a pair of lower opening portions 288a penetrating toward each other, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening portion 288a of the lower surface decoration member 288 from above and fixed to the lower surface decoration member 288 and the substrate cover 287. , Are provided. In this example, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decoration member 281 and the bottom decoration member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is arranged at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289, and the central lens 282 and the side lens The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, in this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

In the front decoration member 281 in the upper decoration unit 280 of the present example, the inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a is a circular arc shape in which the center upper end is a side extending leftward and rightward, the center lower end is a vertex, and each side is loose in front view. It is formed in a variable pentagonal shape extending to the upper side, and has three projecting portions that extend into the central opening 281a from substantially the center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the lower end apex. Further, the front decoration member 281 is formed with a plurality of streak lines that extend obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and the streak causes the front decorative member 281 to extend from the central opening 281a. The blade is formed in a shape that extends, and a side opening 281b is formed along the streak.

The outer shape of the central lens 282 fitted in the central opening 281a of the front decoration member 281 is substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and the front surface of the central lens 282 is bulged forward. Are formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that has been cut with a trillian, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a pedestal of the jewelry. ..

The inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is made of a transparent resin so as to close the rear side opening of the central lens 282, and has a fine lens (or prism) on the surface. A plurality of them are formed so that the light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be diffused widely toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is made of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been done. A plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284 similarly to the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. It can emit light.

It should be noted that the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of white turbidity due to a plurality of fine lenses formed on the surface, so that the rear side cannot be clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. Is becoming

The main body member 285 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a contour that substantially follows the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decoration member 281 and extends cylindrically in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening inclines downward obliquely and is closed at the rear end. Is inclined obliquely upward, a rear end that is disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a and is closed is at substantially the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286 and penetrating the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b. ing. When the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b of the main body member 285 have a shape recessed from the front side to the rear side so that the lights from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b do not laterally affect.

Further, the lower surface decoration member 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. The shape of the end portion of the upper speaker covers 266 and 266 is substantially the same as the shape of the end portions of the upper end frames 202c and 242c, and the end portions of the upper speaker covers 226 and 266 near the upper end frames 202c and 242c are mounted and fixed. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. In addition, the lower lens 289 is supplied with light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the left side upper decoration substrate 254 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. Is to be placed between.

The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk-like shape and a plurality of holes which are curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 that has an annular opening that is formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the lower plate of the plate unit 300 that is arranged below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 291 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected.

In this side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a translucent member having a milky white color similar to the lower plate cover 328 of the plate unit 300 described later.

The side speaker cover 290 of this example is adapted to be attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. It is adapted to be fixed to the door frame base body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position of 110.

Thus, by removing the security cover 180 on the door frame 5 and then removing the screw attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side. By removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 can be removed. Therefore, even if the side speaker 130 needs to be replaced for some reason, the front surface of the side speaker 130 does not have to be removed from the door frame 5 without removing the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, or the like. It is possible to easily remove only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the side speaker cover 290 and to easily replace the side speaker 130.

Thus, in this example, in order to replace the side speaker 130 mounted between the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. First, since the main body member 292 arranged on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, the front door of the main body frame 3 is closed. The frame 5 is opened to the front side, the main body member 292 is removed from the rear side of the door frame 5 to the door frame base main body 110, and then the main body member 292 and the cover body 291 are attached to the door frame base main body 110 (door frame 5). When moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 comes to face from the front side of the door frame 5. Since the side speaker 130 is sandwiched by the speaker bracket 132 attached to the door frame base body 110 from the front side, the speaker for the door frame base body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 is removed after the body member 292 is removed. The bracket 132 is removed to release the side speaker 130 from being clamped, and the side speaker 130 is moved to the front side, so that the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 are moved to the door frame 5 (the door frame base body 110). The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without removing the side speaker 130, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced with the pachinko machine 1.

Further, even when the player or the like hits the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game to damage the side speaker 130, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily installed. Since they can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the exchange of the side speaker 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the prolongation of the interruption makes the player less irritable and less interested, which reduces interest. It can be suppressed.

Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base body 110, so that the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame 5 (without a mounting piece or mounting hole for mounting the side speaker 130). Since it can be attached to the door frame base body 110), the side speaker 130 does not need to be provided with an attachment piece, an attachment hole, or the like, so that the cost of the side speaker 130 can be reduced and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the cover body 291 that covers the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, even if a player or the like hits the cover body 291, the cover body 291 is Deformation or damage can be reduced as much as possible, the side speaker 130 can be sufficiently protected to prevent the occurrence of defects, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. ..

Further, since the side speaker cover 290 that covers the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 should be located relatively close to the player. However, there is a possibility that a player or the like may be hit or damaged to increase the frequency, but as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the game interruption time can be shortened as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Further, since the side speaker 130 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the player, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be heard by the player more efficiently, and a powerful sound is provided. In addition, it is possible to entertain the sound effect and prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, since the side speaker 130 is arranged between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200, 240 can be maintained and the side decoration unit can be maintained. The 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 can be connected to each other without a sense of discomfort, and the side speaker cover 290 can prevent the appearance from being deteriorated, so that the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed in the side decoration units 200, 240. It is possible to make the player and the dish unit 300 look integral with each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side in addition to the side decoration units 200, 240 and the like. It is possible to improve the design of the front surface of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the crime prevention cover 180 and the glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5, so the main body member 292. Since it takes a little time to remove, it is possible to make it difficult for a person who intends to engage in an illegal act or the like to perform the removal work, and the removal work can be made conspicuous by removing the relatively large glass unit 590. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent (safety) against fraudulent acts or the like can be provided by hesitating to theft acts or fraudulent acts.

[1-2F. Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the rear.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from a prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a plate unit base 310, which is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction, and a plate unit base 310. A plate-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed to approximately the center of the front face and is open on the upper and rear sides and bulges to the front on the left side (shaft support side) greatly. An upper plate upper panel 314 that is formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward as viewed, and a plurality of openings 316a that are attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and that penetrate vertically. The plate front decorative member 316 and a plurality of light guide portions 318a arranged between the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 are fitted into the openings 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The pair of left and right upper plate upper lenses 318 and the upper plate upper lens 318 are arranged on the opposite sides of the upper plate upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314, and a plurality of color LEDs 320a are attached to the upper surface. Upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and upper plate left decorative substrate 322 on which 322a is mounted, and upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and upper plate left decorative substrate 322 that are arranged between upper plate upper lens 318 and upper plate upper panel 314. And an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing light from the upper plate upper lens 318.

Further, in the dish unit 300, the lower side of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 to open the upper and the rear, and the center in the left-right direction is bulged forward in front view and the front end is moved to the center in the left-right direction. The dish-shaped lower tray body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and the center in the left-right direction fixed to the upper portion of the lower tray body 324 is bulged forward in the same manner as the lower tray body 324 and the front end is in the left-right direction. A lower plate having a plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate body 324 and covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a. A cover 328, a plate side middle cover 330 having openings 330a arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower plate cover 328 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a plate side middle cover fitted into the opening 330a of the plate side middle cover 330 from the rear side. A lens 332 and a dish side outer cover 334 arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 and extending in the left and right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100 are provided. In addition, the dish side middle cover 330 arranged on the right side in front view has a lock hole 330b formed at the right end thereof, which is exposed by a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later. A handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the dish side outer cover 334 on the right side when viewed from the front.

Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 for pulling the game balls stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and attached to the lower surface, and the plate unit base 310, which is attached to the upper left side in a front view, is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, see FIG. 171).

The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 of this dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has an oblong rectangular shape which penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d which extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction below the mouth 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) below the vicinity of the right end of the decorative portion 310a, and an upper plate. A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326 to form a horizontally elongated rectangular ring in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g which is arranged in a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It has a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball can pass.

The upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends to the right in front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined lower in the front end direction in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312 is increased. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the upper plate 301 in the front, the paid out game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls there. The direction is changed, and it is guided so as to roll to the right in the front view in the guide recess 310j, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, since the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even if it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed when the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself or herself to a game ball driving operation or a game with a game ball that has been driven in, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 301. You can do it.

The upper bowl discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper bowl removal base 344 of the upper bowl removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the intermediary. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side thereof penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened portion 310k which is widened to the left in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by the widened portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is widened in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball clogging from occurring early in the lower plate ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, so that more games can be played. The balls can be fed into the lower plate 301.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. As for the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed near the intermediate position in the up-down direction, respectively, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that is in contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (earthed) and can remove the static electricity charged in the game ball.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is installed. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312, and a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. An operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400 described later, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decorative attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side of the dish body 312, is provided.

Although detailed description is omitted, the decoration mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 which are attached to the lower surface. The operation unit mounting portion 314c is formed with an opening or the like through which a wiring cord that connects the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can pass, as well as an opening or a notch that penetrates in the direction. ..

The upper front decorative member 316 has a shape that extends in the left-right direction in a curved shape along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314, and has a plurality of openings 316a in which light guiding portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 are guided from below. The upper plate upper lens 318 can be sandwiched between the upper plate upper panel 314 and the upper plate upper panel 314 by attaching it to the decorative mounting portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on the surface is arranged, and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are arranged. The light from the above can be sufficiently diffused, and the whole of the upper plate upper lens 318 can be substantially uniformly illuminated and decorated. As shown in the drawing, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the opening 316a has the same shape. By fitting the light guide portion 318a into the shape, the outer appearance of the upper plate front decorative member 316 looks like a pair-shaped cut jewel is fitted. ..

The bottom plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan shape that extends forward in a plan view, has a rear end formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and has a lower surface with a substantially central portion of the upper surface, and a central portion of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and at the side of the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are mounted and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed in the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening/closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 has an outer shape in a front view that bulges downward and each side is formed in an inverted triangular shape with an arc, and has an opening 328a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328a is the same as the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is made of a translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals on the back side, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

The dish side middle cover 330 is arranged on both left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 when viewed from the front, and is predetermined along the lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the side surface of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front. The upper rear end extending in the width and extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 has an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, in the dish side middle cover 330 on the right side (open side) in front view, a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near the outer end (right side end) thereof. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower portion of the front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is like this. Further, a part of the lower side of the lower dish main body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330c of the dish side middle cover 330.

The dish side outer cover 334 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 in a front view, and has a substantially triangular shape along the side and bottom sides of the door frame 5 in a front view, and is opened rearward and upward. It is formed in a box shape. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right side (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and a part of the dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the dish side outer cover 334 and the dish side middle cover 330 cover the lower side of the lower dish body 324 excluding the central portion.

The upper bowl ball removal mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and an operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341. And the operation piece 342 which is moved up and down by a larger amount than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310, and the up and down movement of the operation piece 342 causes the up and down slide and slides in the up and down direction. In the above, the upper plate ball removing slider 343, which is provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310, with the contact piece 343a that contacts the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, and the upper plate ball removing slider 343 can be slid vertically. An upper dish ball removing base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

The upper plate ball removing base 344 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharging port 310d of the plate unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper plate ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 43), and the ball guiding flow path 344b that guides the game sphere that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 42). 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, and then extends toward the right side (shaft support side) end in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344. It is provided with a ball removing channel 344c through which a game ball can be distributed.

In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the sphere guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a sphere of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is designed to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. Can be supplied to.

In addition, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply trough 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 is loaded. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removing channel cover 345.

In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also formed. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding path 344b. Then, it is discharged from the ball discharge port 581b to the ball discharge channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged.

Note that the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feed unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutting piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343, whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, so that the ball pulling member 583. Even if the game balls are strongly supplied onto the partition part 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like are It is possible to prevent damage and also to prevent the game ball from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

The lower dish ball punching mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball punching base 351 arranged between the bottom plate portions 330 of the dish side middle covers 330 arranged below the lower dish body 324 on the left and right in a front view. , A plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 352 that is pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removal base 351 and that can open and close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324, and the lower plate that rotates the opening/closing shutter 352. A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a vertically penetrating at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which vertically penetrates. 352b, and a closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring between the lower dish ball removing base 351 and the lower dish ball removing base 351 to close the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a.

Although not shown in detail, the opening/closing shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin capable of contacting the lower dish ball removing slider 353. , The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slider 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. You can do it.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is arranged below the center of the lower dish cover 328 of the dish unit 300 in the left-right direction and at a position sandwiched by the left and right dish side middle covers 330. The surface shape is smoothly continuous with the surface shapes of the lower dish cover 328 and the dish side middle cover 330.

Further, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening/closing shutter 352 is substantially the same as the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold the lower dish ball removing slider 353 in the moving position.

This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Therefore, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening/closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides backward. The opening/closing shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring.

Then, as the opening/closing shutter 352 is rotated rearward, the shutter ball removing hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower plate ball removing hole. Matching with 324b, the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removing slider 353 holds the slide by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removing button 354 remains rearwardly retracted and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if they are held in the same state as the extraction hole 3324b and the lower tray ball removal button 354 is not continuously pressed.

On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the retracted and opened state is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the holding of the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower plate is removed. The opening/closing shutter 352 is configured such that the ball-sliding slide 353 can slide, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball-hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 moves downward. It returns to the position of the closed state that substantially coincides with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 302.

It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit 300. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper plate 301 of the dish, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card will be returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan There is. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball lending unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball lending unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and which mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 on the shaft support side (left side in front view).

The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as the conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be used as a pachinko machine, and even a new pachinko machine 1 (new model of pachinko machine) can reduce the anxiety and the like given to the player and make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play. Has become.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the upper right front side, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of driving the game ball into the player, , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. A base member having a spring 418 biased upward, an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 that has an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 to pass through, and a base member 420 that is attached below the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420. Mainly includes a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surfaces of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support board 430 in which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted on the upper surface at a position corresponding to the ring of dial operation part 401 and having an opening 430a through which button support cylinder 416b and inner cylinder part 401a of dial operation part 401 can pass. And a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 for detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, a pressure detection sensor 432c detecting operation of the pressure operation unit 405, and a pressure operation unit 405. And a button decoration board 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below.

The dial operation part 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and an outer side from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending cylindrically downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b, and an outer cylinder portion 401c shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder. A flange portion 401d that extends annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c is mainly provided. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a coupling locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner tubular portion 401a, and the coupling locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operating portion 401a is locked. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation portion 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner tubular portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, the details of which will be described later. The step portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting against the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the drawing, the contacting surfaces of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so as to have a large contact area when they abut each other. Thus, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operating portion 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operating portion 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation portion 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is applied to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower outer periphery and having a lower end protruding outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b of the operation portion holding member 416 are provided. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (depressing operation portion 405) does not rotate inside the button support cylinder 416b. It should be noted that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the clearance causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It can be rotated within a range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a pressure detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower portion of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detectable by the pressure detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a is provided between the upper side and the lower side. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. Accordingly, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner tubular portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character "Push" is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has a ring-shaped sliding contact with the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being engaged with the connection engagement part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detecting pieces 410c are adapted to be detected by a pair of rotation detecting sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details of the rotation detecting pieces 410c will be described later. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 rotates the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, by rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in the forward and reverse directions in small steps by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to add a feeling.

Further, the operation portion holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f (lock projection 416f formed on an inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking the locking claw 406b of the button body 406). 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for sending light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom portion of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416e which is pressed from the upper side by the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 and which extends downward from the lower surface to hold the button decoration board 432 in a locking manner. I have it.

Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed inside the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks the same. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b that is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted and a bottom portion (ceiling part) of the lower recess 420b, and vertically penetrates the operation portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape that allows the gear rail 416a to pass therethrough, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and that is recessed downward at least to accommodate the driven gear 410 are provided. I have it. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f opening downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed above the upper concave portion 420c, and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g located above different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430 protruding to the bottom. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses for mounting the respective members, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recess portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass through the opening 420a in the center. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the operation portion holding member 416 from above into the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions with respect to each other. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on the top plate thereof. ing. The top cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

The upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the minor axis direction (front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1) and has its lower end protruding outward. I have it. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off from the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 422a from below with the operation portion holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401 and the like attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass therethrough, it is possible to prevent the dial operation part 401 from coming off upward by the opening 422a.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper portion, and has an outer peripheral shape that substantially matches the outer periphery of the upper cover 422, and the leg portion of the base member 420 is located at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the bottom portion. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that are engageable with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that penetrates through the center in the vertical direction and allows the dial operation portion 401 (excluding the collar portion 401d) to pass through, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. ..

The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although not shown in detail, it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In this state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so that the lower surface thereof is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when a pressing operation is performed or a tapping operation is performed, so that the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the cover body 426 is attached. The structure is such that a surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 have an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length of the rotation detection piece 410 in the circumferential direction. It is said that. As a result, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection/non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation portion 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, which will be described later in detail. .. In addition, the operation unit 400 gradually rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 as shown in FIG. Since the 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner tubular portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small increments in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By repeating turning and reversing, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game or effect. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. In addition to being operable, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and it is possible to entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. it can.

In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is inevitably hit and the operation unit The force of striking 401, 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the concentration of hit impact can be suppressed to prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. As a result, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 capable of withstanding a smash, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405, entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300, and when the operation portions 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with a shock or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 becomes the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the impact and the load can be received by the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, so that the impacts and the like from the operation portions 401 and 405 are dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like. The operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can improve impact resistance and load resistance.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at a position away from the position supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 is impacted by the operation portions 401 and 405 by coming into contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. The part supporting the member is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, since the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side holds the dial operation portion 401 so that a part of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view, the dial operation portion 401 is held. When the operating portion 401 is struck from the upper side, even if the operating portion holding member 416 holding the dial operating portion 401 comes off from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operating portion 401 contacts the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can favorably prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 in accordance with the game state, the dial operation unit 401 is arbitrarily rotated (rotationally driven including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effect produced by the operation units 401 and 405, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit is operated. It is possible to make the effect using 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and prevent it from getting tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the dial operating unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotary shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is, by definition, set to the dial operating unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotating shaft of (410), even if the dial operating unit 401 or the pressing operating unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotating shaft of the dial operating unit 401. It is possible to avoid directly contacting the dial drive motor 414 and prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 supports the dial operating portion 401 through the opening 420a, the dial operating portion 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to the impact or load from the 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut against the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 will be It is possible to reliably prevent the depression from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating portion 401 and the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating portion 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation motor 414 frequently rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 or the dial drive motor 414. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of the fact that the amount of heat generated by the excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, so that it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating, and the dial drive means 414 can be prevented. It becomes possible to withstand a high load, and the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial driving means 414 as described above can be sufficiently embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player. can do.

Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the pressing of the pressing operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, and it is more convenient for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with which the player can experience, and it is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation sections 401 and 405 are provided, the operation sections 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated, so that the operation sections 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are brought into contact with each other, so that the player operates the pressing operation portion 405. When is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 vibrates the dial operation part 401 by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined angle range, so that the dial operation part 401 is vibrated by virtue of the step 407a in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation part 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, and entertaining the effect using the operation unit 400. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move arbitrarily, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that something is happening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 is allowed to participate. In addition to facilitating the operation, the player can positively operate the operation unit 400, entertaining the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance of the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being deteriorated due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation part 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation part 405, a dial drive is performed. Even if the motor 414 drives the dial operation unit 401 to rotate, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The roles of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can be easily entertained with the operation unit 400, and the upper surface of the pressing operation section 405 can be guided. The characters "PUSH" displayed can be easily read by the player without turning or tilting greatly, and the player can be sure to recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated by pressing. be able to.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 is provided with a protruding portion 401f protruding from the inner periphery of the inner tubular portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined vertical position. Since the stepped portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner tubular portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 can be brought as close as possible at the upper end of the operation unit 400. In addition, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be provided through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the foreign matter makes it difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate and for the pressing operation unit 405 to become difficult to press. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, a portion of the dial operation portion 401 in the circumferential direction is pressed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position deviated from the center of the pressing operation unit 405 to the outer periphery), the dial operation unit 401 is surely contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 are in contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation portion 401 side, and the load resistance with respect to the pressing operation portion 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation portion 401, there is a case where it is not inclined. By comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially distributed outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing the load from concentrating and increasing the resistance of the operation unit 400. The loadability and shock resistance can be surely enhanced, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of malfunctions during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward/reverse rotation, not only the dial operation portion 401 is simply rotated, but also the dial operation portion 401 can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, forward/reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) having the above-described operational effects can be surely embodied because it can be easily vibrated by repetition.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the plate unit 300 has a high strength and rigidity in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently deal with a strong hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation portion 405), and it is possible to easily entertain the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the rear. As illustrated, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion holes 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis in a round shape; an annular rotary handle body rear 504 that is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502; A rotating handle body front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and integrally rotatable with the rotating handle body rear 504, and a handle base 502 arranged on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. A front end cover 508 that rotatably supports the front 506 of the rotating handle body and the rear 504 of the rotating handle body in cooperation with each other.

Further, the handle device 500 is a shaft member 510 having a non-circular bearing portion 510a attached and fixed to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to project from the front side to the rear side, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. The rotational position detection sensor 512, which has a detection shaft portion 512a that is fitted and rotatable with 510a, is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotational position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502. A sensor support member 514 fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and having a through hole 514a through which the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass; a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514; Reference numeral 516 denotes a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, a single-shot button 520 rotatably supported by the sensor support member 514 to operate the firing stop switch 518, and a shaft member 510. A handle return spring 522 which is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery and biases the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body 504 to return to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view); Equipped with.

As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example has a front end side that is bulged in a hemispherical shape that expands to the front side, and a rear end side that is a cylindrical shape with an open rear end. And three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft of the rotary handle main body 506 is formed, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 506a formed in the front 506 of the rotating handle body. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front of the rotary handle main body 506 comes into contact with the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, thereby restricting the rotation range of the rotary handle main bodies 504, 506.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking projection 506b protruding rearward is formed on the front 506 of the rotary handle main body, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514, and the handle return spring 522 causes the rotary handle body 504 to rotate. , 506 are urged to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

The handle device 500 of this example is configured to be attached to the handle attaching portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip portion inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotation handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 detects the rotation position through the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the turning position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the rotating handle bodies 504 and 506. It is like this. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 rotate, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball You can type in. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520 and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654. It is like this. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, it is possible to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, before operating the one-shot button 520. It is possible to shoot a game ball with the driving strength.

The handle device 500 of the present example electrically detects the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512, fire control. Since the rotation driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the section 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided, like a conventional pachinko machine. , It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the door frame 5 is linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed, and the link is released when the door frame 5 is opened. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest due to a defect in hitting the game ball.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 54 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is shot by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example is provided with a cover base 542 having a flow path for a plurality of game balls inside, the front side of which is open, and a front cover 544 which closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first ball inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 that communicates with the first ball inlet. The first ball passage 542b that spreads to the right as viewed from the front, the second ball entrance 542c that is arranged outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right when viewed from the rear) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a, and the second Inside the cover base 542, which communicates with the ball passage 542d, there is provided a second ball inlet 542c which extends downward and is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in a front view. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, as shown in the figure. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e that is open upward, and can communicate the game ball to an upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank 793. The open/close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is adapted to be connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 of this example uses the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. The upper plate 101 can be supplied from 544a via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. 544b can supply the lower plate 302 to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply trough 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the game ball shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the second ball outlet 544b through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply). ) You can do it.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms the upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and the cover base 542 is swingable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. Of the swing member 548 that is pivotally supported by the full tank, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that urges the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full member detection sensor 550 does not detect the full tank. And 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the swinging member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end that rotates leftward when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , Is provided, and static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of the game balls can be removed.

In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even when the upper plate 301 is full, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game balls stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also filled, the game balls will flow to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch unit 770 It is supplied from the full tank outlet 776 to the lower tray 302 of the dish unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the game balls cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the second ball passage 542d stays in the accommodation space 546. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a lot of the game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 stops the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and at the same time, the dish unit for the player. A notification that prompts the game ball in 300 to be discharged to the outside is provided.

In addition, when the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is detected. It is not detected, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2J. Ball feeding unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case removed. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. It is possible to pull out to the lower tray 302 by operating the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340.

In this ball feeding unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening to the lower side of the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and closing the rear end of the front cover 581 and opening the front. Box-shaped, a rear cover 582 having a batting ball supply port 582a for supplying a gaming ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from an entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the batting ball launcher 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover. A ball removing member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that partitions the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581; , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover one by one, and are supported rotatably around an axis extending vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. And a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball punching base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing opening 581b below the entrance 581a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 583a is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end thereof extends around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotatable rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and the ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110. It is configured to come into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is adapted to rotate with respect to the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the ball hitting launcher 650 from the ball hitting supply port 582a, and enters the partition part 583a from the entrance 581a. The blocking section 584a blocks the movement of the ball toward the ball holding section 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) side and remains in the state of staying on the partition section 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 586 whose tip swings vertically due to the driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 585, and the movement of the tip swinging vertically in the ball feeding operation rod 586. A ball feed crank 587 that rotates about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the up-down direction. The ball feed crank 587 includes an engaging portion 587a that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and the ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 57) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation in FIG. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 which is swung by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 moving forward and backward. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

Further, although the ball removing member 583 rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example receives a moment to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the weight portion 583c, The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300, so that the rotation thereof is restricted. In normal times, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 581b side. Then, when the player presses down the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and abuts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition 581a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball is The partition portion 583a can be prevented from bouncing back.

As described above, according to this example, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player uses the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven to send the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the ball hitting device 650 drives the game ball into the game area 1100, whereby the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is reached. The game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharging mechanism (ball-stripping member 583) are arranged, so that not only the ball-sending member 584 and the ball-stripping member 583 but also the ball-sending member 584 and the ball-striking device 650 are possible. When the game balls in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the number of game balls remaining on the ball feeding member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and prevent the interest from being lowered.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and to hit the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the operation, and to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled up with the game balls in an early stage. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's annoyance and suppress a decrease in interest, and the size of the plate unit 300 can be reduced while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game is relatively performed. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, compared with a case where the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 are provided separately, only the ball feed unit 580 is attached to the ball feed member 580. Since the 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached to each other, the labor for assembling can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 have a problem. However, even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be easily solved.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper dish ball There is no need to configure a transmission mechanism (upper dish ball removing mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removing button 341 to the ball removing member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 which can be opened and closed. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the transmission mechanism ( It is possible to avoid the risk that the transmission mechanism is quickly consumed and malfunctions or is damaged due to the interruption of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340), and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580 and the like. And durability can be improved.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, only by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, the game balls can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the discharge of the game balls from, and it is possible for the player to easily operate the ball removing operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removing button 341.

Further, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, since the partition part 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition part 583a as small as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feeding device are provided. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects can be provided.

Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is biased upward, and when the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 connects the admission port 581a and the hitting ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts on the partition part 583a, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition part 583a (ball removing member The durability of 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact on the partition 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper bowl ball removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition 583a, it can be made difficult to splash and the splash of the game ball can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partition portion 583a is slid, it relates to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a in the planar projection can be reduced. The effect of can be achieved.

Further, since the partition part 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entry port 581a and the ball removal port 581b communicate with each other, when a problem occurs in the partition part 583a or the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340, the partition part 583a Is rotated by its own weight so that the entrance and discharge ports are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (insertion device) side even though the discharge operation section is not operated. Since it is not discharged to the player side, it can be made known to the player that the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble, and it can be moved to the pachinko machine 1 with no trouble, which is interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, in the ball removing member 583, the partition portion 583a is rotated through the bent rotation rod portion 583b. Therefore, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent. The impact is linearly transmitted to the rotary shaft by dispersing the light with the rotary shaft 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotary rod portion 583b, and the durability of the ball removing member 583 is improved. Can be increased.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game ball in the upper plate 301, the left and right sides of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are discharged. It is possible to minimize the movement in the direction, improve the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580, and discharge the game ball satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge route of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can serve as a discharging mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from unnecessarily increasing in size.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. This glass unit 590 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. Transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a which are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction on the left and right sides and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate which extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and extends downward. And a locking piece 592b having a shape.

In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to engage with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIGS. 23, 28, etc.).

In this way, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls lined up and down below the vertically elongated oval game window 101, On the right side of the lower plate 302 when viewed from the front, for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. As described above, the dish unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. It has a continuous, continuous appearance.

Further, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, etc. provided in each of the units 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby causing the game window 101. Also, the lower plate cover 328 can be light-emitted and decorated with an arbitrary emission color so as to surround the opening 328a. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided on the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs are mounted on the rear side of the emission lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. By turning on or off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256, it is possible to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens sections 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same light emission mode (the emission color and the light emission pattern are the same), it is possible to provide a substantially uniform light emission decoration, and if the light emission modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. By doing so, it is possible to make a light-emitting decoration that is discontinuous in the circumferential direction, and if the light-emitting modes are made different so as to emphasize the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, they will radiate radially around the center of the game window 101. It can be made to be a light-emitting decoration and can attract a player's interest strongly.

Further, in the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is made of an aluminum alloy by die casting, and the cover main body 426 causes the base member 420 of the dish unit 300 to operate. Since the operation unit attaching portion 314c is hung, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed so that the cover body 426 bends when the dial operating portion 401 or the pressing operating portion 405 is hit, and the base member 420 is lowered. Since it comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c via the cover 424, the impact applied to the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, etc. can be alleviated, and the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged. You can do it.

Further, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation portion 401, and even if the player or the like strongly hits the pressing operation portion 405, the dial operation portion 401 is also included. Since it is struck by the ball, the impact that is struck by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and it is possible to prevent the impact from being concentrated and make it difficult to damage. Further, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly project from below from the upper surface. The impact of hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410, and when the operating portion holding member 416 bends downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the opening 420a made of metal. Since the base member 420 can be brought into contact with the upper surface and the impact can be received by the base member 420, the load on the operation portion holding member 416 can be reduced, and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be improved.

Further, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the dish unit 300 from above, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced even if the operation unit 400 is damaged. The replacement of the unit 400 can prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from decreasing.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emitting decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Further, FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 that substantially corresponds to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and the gaming window 101 is made to emit each LED as appropriate. The outer circumference of the can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except for the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens parts 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the emission lens parts 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower part of the left and right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a and the emission lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 are surrounded by the non-translucent (in this example, a surface has a plating layer) side decoration frames 202, 242. Is surrounded.

Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged relative to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The light guide portions 212b and 252b are formed so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance and extend to a position as close as possible to the rear surface of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. Has been done. Although not shown in detail in the main body 212a, 252a of the side inner lens 212, 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface of the main body 212a, 252a, and the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254 arranged on the rear side are arranged. , 256 can diffuse the light.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, have circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a, respectively. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged at corresponding positions, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decoration). The unit 280 has a lower normal brightness than the LED 286b of the upper decorative substrate 286. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged vertically corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red LEDs.

In this example, the surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214, the right-side lower decorative substrate 216, the left-side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), white coating, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210, 250 from becoming too dark and unattractive to look, and by reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that face the left-right center of the door frame 5. Is formed so as to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 arranged. The center lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent white (milky white) member. .. As a result, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on its surface, and can diffuse and refract light. Looking at the inner lens 283, the central lens 282 looks deep and the central lens 282 itself seems to be shining. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283 cannot be seen from the player side.

On the upper decoration substrate 286 of the upper decoration unit 280, a plurality (six in this example) of LEDs 286a arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283 corresponding to the central lens 282, and the rear lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are arranged. A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this example, two for the side lens 284, one for the lower lens 289, and one for the lower lens 289) are arranged on the side. In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-intensity white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the plurality of jewel-shaped light guide portions 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged along the front edge of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200, 240. The front decorative members 316 are arranged in a row in a state of being exposed through the openings 316a, and when viewed from the front, as shown in the drawing, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper lens 318 form the outside of the lower side of the game window 101. (Lower side) is designed to be decorated. Below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a protruding portion corresponding to each light guide portion 318a is arranged. The upper plate upper lens 318 of the plate unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper plate upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

The upper dish inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) of the upper dish lens 318 corresponding to the light guide portion 318a to diffuse or refract light. Therefore, like the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guiding portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is provided with a depth and a glittering brilliance to guide the light. The light portion 318a looks like a jewel. Further, the upper plate upper inner lens 319 prevents the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 disposed on the lower side from being seen from the player side through the light guide portion 318a.

On the upper surfaces of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality (six in this example) of light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 are provided. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmitting cylindrical pressing operation portion arranged inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the push operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 430b (four in this example) arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a high-intensity white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effect as the above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery of the upper side of the lower side of the game window 101 correspond to each other. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a have a first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by making the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light as appropriate, substantially concentric circles surrounding the game window 101 A plurality of (two in this example) light-emitting decorations can be provided. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch close to the game window 101 is illuminated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 102 and the LEDs 214b. It is a radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower left-right center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the two annular groups 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LED 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side of the right side decoration unit 200 is defined as the upper right side group 105. By appropriately emitting the LED 214c, one of the upper right side surfaces of the door frame 5 is removed. The portion (side sub lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101, the upper center that illuminates and decorates the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is defined as a group 106. By appropriately emitting the LED 286a of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and also serves as a reference point for the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. Further, the LEDs 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 are an upper center side group 107 that lights and decorates both left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 286b of the upper center side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 are illuminated and decorated, and the upper side of the game window 101 (including the upper portion). It is possible to decorate it with V-shaped light.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320a corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300 for decorating the lower side of the game window 101. , 322a is a lower group 108 that light-emits the outer periphery of the lower side of the game window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the game window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be illuminated and decorated, and also the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. , 216a, 254a, 256a, the entire outer circumference of the game window 101 can be illuminated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the dish unit 300 in the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation unit group 109 is used for light emission decoration. By appropriately causing the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109 to emit light, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be determined. The player can be notified.

The light-emitting decoration on the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and the peripheral lenses 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the radial lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d, three from the right side in front view. In addition, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 interposed therebetween, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. No. 2 system, and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission, and in actual light emission control, It doubles to 84 lines. Further, the LEDs 286b, 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a, 109b to which the LEDs 286b, 430b belong require a large amount of current in order to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected to each system, and in actual light emission control, the number is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, so that the same number of systems is used for the actual light emission control, that is, ten systems.

Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or similar colors) to spread outward with the game window 101 as the center. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by coordinating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4, the front unit 2000, etc., the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101. With the LED of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it becomes possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to suppress the entertaining of the player and the decrease in interest.

Further, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, light is circulated around the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light from each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 108a to 108d. Such a light emitting effect, light moves toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101, or light from the central lens 282 extends along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to produce a moving light effect. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. , If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Further, by making only the radial group 104 emit light, a light emission effect is produced in which the game window 101 is emitted as a center, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By doing so, a light-emitting effect in which the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is made to emit light substantially uniformly, or by making the radial group 104 emit light (lighting/blinking) while the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light It is possible to give a luminous effect that gives an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by making each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 individually emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the emission lens units 210b and 250b circulate.

Also, by causing each of the systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106 to emit light at the same time, the entire central lens 282 emits light, or by causing each of the systems 106a to 106c to sequentially emit light, the light rotates in the central lens 282. It is possible to perform various luminous effects. In addition, by making the upper center side group 105 emit light, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness to give the player a chance or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a certain variation game). State, time saving game state, probability variation short time saving game state, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to emit light from above the player's head toward the player, and can make the player easily notice the light emission of the LED 286b with high brightness. ..

Furthermore, by making each system 108a-108d of the lower group 108 light-emit appropriately, the front edge of the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making it emit light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 Also, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, by making the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 emit light as appropriate, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guides the rotating operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is produced. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108,. For each 109 or each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, it is possible to perform a light-emission effect with different gradations of light-emission color, brightness, etc. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

Thus, in the door frame 5 of the present example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are set to the first close to the game window 101. Since the ring-shaped group 102 and the second ring-shaped group 103 farther from the game window 101 outside the first ring-shaped group 102 can be made to emit light, a plurality of outsides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) can be provided. Can be decorated in a substantially concentric circle, and by surrounding the outer periphery of the game window 101 with light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that is not available in conventional pachinko machines, and a pachinko machine that attracts the attention of the player strongly. It can be set to 1.

In addition, one circumferential lens section 210a, 250a is provided with LEDs of two systems arranged in a substantially concentric circle shape. Since the light emission decoration can be performed in a substantially concentric shape, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the mode of the light emission decoration from the appearance. 240) can be greatly changed, and the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention by increasing the impact of the light emission decoration can be provided.

Further, on the outside of the transparent game window 101 that closes the front surface of the game area 1100, on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 of the left and right decorative units 200, 240 in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, which are radially arranged, are arranged. 254b, 256b, and LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, which are circumferentially divided by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and are arranged substantially concentrically. Therefore, by making the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light in accordance with the game state, it is possible to make the outer periphery of the game window 101 emit light in a plurality of annular shapes. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a luminous decoration that has not been seen in the past pachinko machines, so that the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

Further, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, which are composed of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 in the door frame 5, are arranged in a substantially concentric shape (FIG. 60). Therefore, by causing the second annular group 103 and the first annular group 102 to emit light in this order from the outside to the inside, a light emission effect in which the light converges toward the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. Can be carried out, and the player's interest can be directed to the game area 1100, and at the same time, it can be thought that something is good in the game area 1100, and the expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Further, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light in order from the inner side to the outer side, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to make the player have an expectation that something good will be provided by the light emission effect spreading to, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, since it is possible to perform the above-described light emission effect outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only the player playing the pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to show the above-mentioned light-emitting effect to the player in the game hall, strongly attract the interest of other players, and make it easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. You can

Further, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104 radially arranged to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, which extend in the annular shape, in the circumferential direction. Since the annular luminous decorations by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can be partitioned in the circumferential direction by making these radial groups 104 emit light, it is possible to add an accent to the luminous decorations. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interest by changing the light-emitting decoration. In addition, the radially arranged radial groups 104 allow the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to circumferentially correspond to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. Since the system is divided into the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the respective peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are caused to emit light independently for each system 102a, 102j, 103a to 103j. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which light moves in the circumferential direction, and by providing a wider variety of light emission effects, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 hard to get tired of.

Further, the side lenses 210, 250 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a and emission lens portions 210b, 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b. As compared with the case where the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a to be integrated, it is possible to change the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 by probability. Even when the light is not decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can enhance the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 and attract the player's attention. Even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a arranged annularly and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged radially. , 254b, 256b are made to emit light in the same light emission mode, it is possible to make an illusion that the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a and the emission lens portions 210b, 250b are integrated, and the outer periphery of the game window 101 is integrated. It is possible to perform a ring-shaped light emission decoration, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently exhibited.

In addition, in one circumferential lens portion 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 partitioned in the circumferential direction by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b radially arranged. , 216a, 254a, 256a are made to correspond to each other, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are caused to emit light, respectively, even if the appearance is one. By doing so, since it is possible to decorate the light emission substantially concentrically, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and it is possible to increase the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emission decoration. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of increasing the impact of the decoration and strongly attracting the interest of the player.

Further, a side inner lens 212 for diffusing the light from the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 to irradiate the side lenses 210, 250. Since 252 is provided, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the light emission decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250, improve the appearance of the light emission decoration, and in addition, emit LEDs 214a, 216a that emit dots. Even if 254a and 256a are used, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be light-emitted and decorated in a planar shape, so that a light-emitting body that emits linear light (for example, cold cathode tubes (fluorescent tubes), neon tubes, organic EL, etc.) In comparison with the case of using, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a can be made to emit light individually, so that the light emission in the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can also be changed in the circumferential direction. It is possible to provide a variety of light emitting effects, prevent the player from getting tired of playing, and suppress the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest.

Further, since the light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212, 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210, 250 is increased, the rear side of the side inner lenses 212, 252 is irregularly refracted by the side inner lenses 212, 252. The decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 arranged in the can be made difficult to see, and the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. can be seen directly from the player side and are prevented from becoming unattractive. You can

Furthermore, since the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b is guided by the light guide portions 212b, 252b of the side inner lenses 212, 252 to irradiate the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250, The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b can be surely guided to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b for light emission decoration, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized. Further, the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 ensure the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 even if the distances between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b are long. Since the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can widely illuminate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, the space between the side lenses 210 and 250 is sufficient. The radially arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a that secure the space, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

Further, since the side decoration frames 202 and 242 surround the outer circumferences of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the emission lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250, the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is emitted from the emission lenses. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the influence of light from the portions 210b and 250b or from the emission lens portions 210b and 250b on the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a, and it is possible to prevent the respective light-emitting decorations from interfering with each other. It is possible to prevent and provide a good-looking light emission effect.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is axially supported on the left side in front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end portion of the front view of 600, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The award ball unit 700 for and a flow of game balls from the award ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600. A ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 for

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the door frame 5 except the game board 4 and electric parts provided in the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 which is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and which locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view that is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially forward and backward. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the locking device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, when the main body frame base 600 is laid down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed on the main body frame base 600. Is able to improve.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 is a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer circumference of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms a front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in front view, a recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Of the door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the door, the upper bending protrusion 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. An engaging groove 603 into which the bent protruding piece 163 is inserted and engaged is provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion that spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

Further, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board placing portion 606 on which the game board 4 is placed and the game board placing portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and predetermined positions on the inner wall on the right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605 are formed on the game board of the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front side right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally so that the upper shaft supporting metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft supporting metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and the door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with a positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and a firing solenoid 654 of a hitting ball launching device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in a front view. And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, in the main body frame base 600 of this example, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed further rearward than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 descends. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with an opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the opening 614 and both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is adapted to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the lower rear wall portion 604. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around a shaft center supported by a fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. The operation piece 690b extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, so that by making contact with the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Has become.

Further, in the body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( As shown in FIG. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front-rear direction on the inner side (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in front view. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in the left-right direction under the lower end of the door hook hole 620. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the substantially vertical center, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is performed. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

Further, the main body frame base 600 is gently and obliquely descended from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then, at the substantially center in the left-right direction, the lower rear wall part 604. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 that hangs down from an intermediate position in the vertical direction to a position slightly higher in the vertical direction. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and the details will be described later, but the game balls that have flowed through the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 are It is now in circulation.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided at the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 605 at the rear end on the rear side in the rear view, and a plurality of rear cover shaft support portions 623 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 of the body frame 3 are attached to the body mount base 600 on the metal fixture mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower left ends of the front view of the body frame base 600 using predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft support pin 633. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63) penetrating in the up and down direction, and a downward swing from the left end of the front extension portion 632 in front view as viewed from the front to rotate the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) that regulates the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and the body frame 3 is axially supported with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extension portion 642b, and the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the front extension portion 642b. A stopper 642d is provided upright from the left end of the front side of 642a as viewed from the front, and restricts the pivot end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame support metal fittings 644 of the lower support metal fittings 640 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and have a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of this example is such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame is mounted. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support metal fitting 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is like this.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 to form a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal support 630 and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal support 640. Are located on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support holes of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 are fitted and inserted into the support protrusions 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c and the metal fitting 642c are positioned coaxially with each other, and the door pin 5 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame fitting hole 642c of the door frame fitting 642 in the lower fitting fitting 640. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is not supported. Once it is slid downward, the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 made of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward from the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the launch solenoid 654, the hammer 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the hammer tip 658. A hammer 656 at the tip of a ball hammer 656 is provided between a launch rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in a front view and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652, and a launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. At the same time that 658 is allowed to pass, a ball stopper piece 662 that holds a game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 and forms a gap that the game ball cannot pass through, and is held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. And a stopper 664 for restricting the rotation of the hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) to the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position at which the played game ball can be hit.

Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the batting mallet 656 of the batting launcher 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b, which is oriented in the normal direction and has a tip 658 fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c, which extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and is in contact with the stopper 664, are provided. ing. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to extend substantially along the lower extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 which covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and a turning position of the hitting mallet 656 apart from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the abutting can be suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc., the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower part of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the fal space 626 that extends downward in the left-right direction by a predetermined width. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example shoots the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by launching the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launch rail 660. You can do it. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received in the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is adapted to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Therefore, the launching solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. By (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting mallet 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. Further, FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear view of the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Based on the above, it is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and that aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends it to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls that are aligned by the tank rail unit 730. A payout device 740 for paying out based on an instruction, and a game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding to the lower plate 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fixing and fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof and to the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear view. Back cover fastening holes 780b are formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. And is integrally molded with transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a by a predetermined width, and is arranged in substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and a rear side of a vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the award ball, the prize ball passage 715 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 for guiding the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 downward, and the rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and escape holes 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a mounting hole, a mounting boss, or the like for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, or the like, or the body frame base 600. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape only in the right rear portion (open side rear portion) in a plan view; A discharge port 723 that is formed by a portion of the right rear part that projects rearward of the bottom wall portion 721 of the right side 722 and that opens downward, and a plate shape from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and the front end of the outer peripheral wall 722. An attachment portion 726 for attaching the 720 to the prize ball tank attachment portion 711 of the prize ball base 710.

In this prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the drawing, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end side hangs down by its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game balls can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730, and the tank It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although not shown in detail, the top surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view is lowered toward the right side, In plan view, the right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, and the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed and the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 is a gutter having a predetermined depth with an open upper side, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and a left end (axial support side) end in front view. The bottom is slanted so that This tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude further downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided.

This tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) end in front view is located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 are stored. After receiving, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be moved back and forth in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game ball that are partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically pass through the protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735.

In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 axially supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. In addition, the ball pressing plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball that has not been stepped up by the ball leveling member 727 to be stepped up, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and the pair of alignment gears 732 is axially supported so that the pitch of the teeth is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately prized one by one. Device 740.

It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball inside the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Has become. Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 can be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 inside the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the static electricity charged.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated, and the projecting piece 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 a to the inside of the tank rail 730. By inserting into the projection rail 735a, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game balls and the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game ball discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 that is attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens to the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end (open side) lower end in rear view A prize ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d communicating with the lower end (right side in the rear view) of the sorting space 741b in the rear view and extending downward and opening to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back lid 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support disposed below the back lid 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a second gear 746 that meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741 are the third gear. A rotation detection board 749 is provided on the opposite side with the 747 interposed therebetween so as to be integrally rotatable, and has a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In addition, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls that are attached to the unit base 741 and circulate in the prize ball passage 741c. Is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 that holds the rotation angle sensor 752 and the rotation angle sensor 752 that detects the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. I have it.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate 749). ), and a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side with the back cover 742 sandwiched therebetween and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The metal fitting 757, the payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 sandwiched therebetween, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744 and the back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759 is provided.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the open rear end of the ball removal passage 741d. Are to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be alleviated. You can do it. In addition, the unit base 741 has a side surface on one side (left side in rear view) lower than a position in the supply passage 741a that bulges rearward, and is cut out at the outside of the cut portion of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and so as to penetrate in the front-back direction below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. The presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 741e by pressing the operating piece by the game ball. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball-out switch 741e (ball out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall indicating that the ball is out. It will be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotor 748), a switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and a distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed at an upper portion of the unit base 741. I have it. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 to the grounding metal fitting attaching portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball flowing through the supply passage 741a through the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is removed. You can do it.

The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 is in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end thereof bulges backward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment/detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the rear surface of the center in the up-down direction, and a relay board mounting portion. A sensor board mounting portion 742c for mounting the sensor board 753, which is disposed below the portion 742b, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is prevented. It is designed to facilitate heat dissipation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated in the recess 748a one by one, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the space between the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are detected by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

In the prize ball device 740 of the present example, the payout motor is generated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like to the payout control board 4110, or operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is designed to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 78, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball removing passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 is arranged. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball removing passage 741d are, from the lower end of the ball removing passage 741d, a ball removing passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770, a main body frame base ball removing passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit. It is possible to discharge the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the rear side through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when it is assembled to the main body frame 3, the prize from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300.

The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the rear end upper part on the back surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixed portion 770b. The full-tank branching unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base 710. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole is lowered toward the front end from the rear end, and is opened upward in the substantial center of the rear end upper part in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving a game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and expanding in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And, a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79), and discharges the game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 to the front to front the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens to the right end of the view and a full tank passage 775 that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79). ) And a game ball that has flowed through the full tank passage 775 to the front, and a full tank ball outlet 776 that opens to the left of the normal ball outlet 774 in front view is provided.

Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removal receiving opening 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part in front view and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball received in the withdrawal opening 777 to the front side, and the game ball that has flowed through the ball removal passage 778 is discharged forward and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view and A ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full-ball outlet 776.

In the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5. The ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are arranged so as to communicate with each other, and the game ball discharged from the normal ball exit 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 to reach the plate unit 300. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 779 are main body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base removal passage 622.

In this full tank branching unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 through the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and exits above the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

By the way, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) while the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot be ejected from the upper plate 301 side from the 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage 773 in the upstream is also filled through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and then moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b, under the dish unit 300. It is designed to be supplied to the dish 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign matter such as dust or dust that has entered the full tank branching unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging without disassembling the full tank branching unit 7700. ..

In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are full, the game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740 are automatically Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the upper plate is full and the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button of the upper plate like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to avoid interruption of the driving of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience during the game and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example branches the passage of the game ball paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game balls accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game balls can be directly driven by 650, and the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 301 is substantially the amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. You can Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided and the game is played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player can be provided, and the wide game area 1100 can entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray and the inlet (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c are provided, the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branching unit 770) of the game balls in the main body frame 3. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

Further, the game balls sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 are preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if the game balls are exchanged for, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to lack of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. ..

Also, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. It becomes possible to dedicate the player to the driving operation of the game ball and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storing plates, It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, it is possible to deepen the storage dish to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls, and the player can frequently play without worrying about the storage amount. And the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. Therefore, the substantial amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full with game balls and the game balls cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the amount of game balls stored in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The number can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 are set to have a size such that the game balls can be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the amount of retention (storage amount) of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is set. Since the number can be increased, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be adapted to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, a game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In doing so, it is possible to easily find the location of the ball clogging from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to eliminate the problem early and increase the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, and is attached to the main body frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed to move the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game balls.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening/closing crank 793 for sliding the opening/closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised via the opening/closing crank 793. And an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank arranged on the front surface of the left end portion in front view to support the opening/closing crank 793 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

Further, the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. Drive rod 793b extending outward from the right side to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening/closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open/close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised, it is arranged on the rear side through the opening/closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full ball outlet 776, etc. in the full tank branching unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, when the opening/closing crank 793 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, the drive pin 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 rotates in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening/closing shutter 792 is adapted to slide in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 contacts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in the front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening/closing shutter 792 descends so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793c of the open/close crank 793 and the open/close operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the open/close crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the urging force of the opening/closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, in response to opening/closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after disassembling it. Further, FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the action of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. 89(A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and FIG. 89(B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 89(A).

The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. The emission power board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, the power board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the emission power board box 830 from the rear side, and the power board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear surface and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And a terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front, a main side relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810, and a peripheral side relay. And a terminal plate 882.

The board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example has a shape extending in the left-right direction as shown in the drawing, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered one step downward and is gradually inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shield wall portion 811 that projects forward from the front surface, an opening 812 that is disposed above the position at which the center of the shield wall portion 811 in the left-right direction is lowered and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shield wall portion 811. And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting section 813 in front view. Cylindrical duct part 814 penetrating through, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speakers 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and left side in rear view (right side in front view) A box housing portion 816, which is opened rearward and upward and is capable of housing the front side of the firing power supply board box 830, is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board base unit 810 sends the game ball, which has flowed through the main body frame base ball removal passage 622, to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. You can do it.

In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are forward from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side through the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, it is possible to form an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. This speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with a space on the rear side of the speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinth-like passage to invert the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 to move forward. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted to the front. ing.

The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the launching power supply board 831, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like via the slits 830a formed in the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detachable from above into a housing recess formed by a box housing 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing 844 of a power board box holder 840, which will be described later, and which is opened upward. It is supposed to be accommodated. Accordingly, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily removed from the front side of the body frame 3 for replacement or repair. Yes (see Figure 63).

Further, the emission power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the emission power supply board 831 includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the power from the DC/DC converter 831a. And a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 to drive it. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed serves as a heat dissipation hole. The slit 830a is formed. In addition, the launch power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides its internal space into two spaces, a space for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , A storage space 830d for storing the DC/DC converter 831a and a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC/DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated by being radiated to the outside through the slit 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current flowing in the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the emission power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its small size, and the replacement operation of the emission power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to the reduction of the time spent for the exchange operation. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the launch power supply board box 830 with the launch power supply board 831 still attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830.

Moreover, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its end of life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly cannot be fired and the game has to be interrupted, the firing power supply substrate 831 can be replaced. Since it can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to very easily eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a direct current power supply from an alternating current power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but charging/discharging is not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. The life of the emission power supply board 831 is extremely longer than that of the emission power supply board 831. In other words, the emission power supply substrate 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply substrate 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are provided not on the power supply board 851 but on the firing power supply board 831 which is a separate body from the power supply board 851. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply board 851 due to the long-term change of As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 which has a short service life.

Further, since the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached and detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity for changing the hitting characteristic Even if an illegal attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power board 831, and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. By doing so, it is possible to make it harder to carry out fraud, and it is possible to prevent fraudulently changing the launching power board 831 that has been optimized and intentionally changing the optimized driving strength, and at the same time making it difficult to carry out fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who feels irritated or the like from developing into fraud such as fraud.

Further, since the emission power board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the emission power board 831 is tampered with, the emission power board 831 is immediately replaced to tamper with it. It can be resolved, the period of interruption of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced by changing the model, the launch power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By changing to the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC/DC converter 831a capable of realizing the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the hit ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 are changed to a new game. It can be matched with board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is prevented from decreasing. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, when exchanging the launch power supply board 831, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 to the island facility such as a game hall, The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall side can be prevented from increasing. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristic is changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control section 4120 (the payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for, and to reduce the burden on the hall side.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is exchanged so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the firing control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. The problem can be solved by doing so, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601 in order to be detachable. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing a fraudulent act is entered through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having high defense power against fraudulent activity can be prevented while preventing fraudulent activity from being performed on the firing power supply board 831.

Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position supporting the launch power supply board box 830 is rearward of the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the launch power supply is possible. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the emission power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the emission power supply board 831 can be easily attached/detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 supplies power to the emission solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 easily deteriorates, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game balls discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 on the left front side from the center in the left and right when viewed from the front. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and a side surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box accommodating portion 843 that is opened forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side. And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the board unit base 810 is formed by flowing through the body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and passing through the opening 812 of the board base unit 810. The game ball flowing down to and the game ball discharged from the out-ball discharging section 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving section 841 will be described later in detail through the discharge passage 842. It can be discharged to.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 house the firing power supply board box 830. The recess can be formed.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and the heat from the electronic components and the like can be externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

In addition, the power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that projects rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 on the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the power supply board box 850, the standing wall portion 850b is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 with the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 connected to the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854. Is formed so as to project to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is adapted to be connected.

By the way, when connecting the connector terminal with the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the board and then pulling the wiring cord toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. A force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side can be prevented from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. The wire cord 854 can be easily turned off by the wiring guide portion 850d after the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be performed and the work process relating to the assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed such that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such that the connection with the 853 is released, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. This makes it easier to remove the board, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, the bending degree of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from breaking due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is probably located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connected connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and it is impossible. It is possible to prevent the application of various forces, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board 850 is covered with the power supply board 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, or the like, which causes a defect, from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and defense power against fraud can be enhanced. Has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminals are connected to the power supply terminals 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting 855 can be made to easily act on the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the power source and the occurrence of a power failure, and the power supply terminal 851 from coming off from the power supply board 851, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a failure.

Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means including the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being released. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor current flow.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if the wiring cord 854 is slid along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that prevents the above and surely achieves the above-described effects.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to be moved to the standing wall portion 850b side, the wiring cord 854 is hard to come off from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to carry out a series of work continuously, and it is possible to simplify the work process relating to assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long, thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 195) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separating/cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and at one place of the plurality of separating/cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened/closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball removal switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the rear surface on the upper left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. A board base 871 having the board base 871, a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 that is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b that extends vertically in the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. Also, a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873 are provided.

The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 of the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency display for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal board 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, and are connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display unit or the CR unit 6 or the like installed on the island facility side when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. A displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) that is formed on the upper inside of the board mounting portion 871a and fixes the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay formed on the lower inside of the board mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

In addition, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape that is open to the rear side, and the inner circumference of the board base 871 has a size that allows the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 to be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in rear view in the left-right direction. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f which is arranged on the left outer side of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The protrusions 871e of the board base 871 are set in a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly less than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, the protrusions 871e are provided on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as much as possible. It is located so that it is close to.

Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the rear right side of the board cover mounting portion 871b rearward in the vertical direction so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of bearings 871g for pivotally supporting the board box cover 875 and a left end rear view. And a locking portion 871h in the shape of a rectangular tube which is arranged on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and is insertable into the board cover attachment portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The inner wall portion 873d extending from 873a forward (to the side of the board base 871) and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and a vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. Pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and elastic claw-shaped engagements that can be engaged with the engagement holes 871f of the substrate base 871 that are formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear. And a pawl piece 873i. Although not shown, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening portion 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 is in the shape of a thin box whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, in the connection terminal plate cover 873, the fixing piece 873h is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked in the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the substrate cover attaching portion 871b.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) thereof. Besides, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting with the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. There is.

In addition, the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b penetrating in the front-rear direction corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and front and rear from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b. And a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The substrate box cover 875 pivotally supports the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be opened and closed. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (a side pivotally supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective collision walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like this.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as the D-sub connector, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear, as shown in the drawing.

As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example, in the assembled state, has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Of the projection 871e and the outer piece portion 871c, and in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the shaft portion 875a of the substrate box cover 875. Since the side wall 875c and the side wall 875c are respectively present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to intrude an illicit tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool will not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal will not be bent. It is possible to surely prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the plate 874 and reliably prevent an illegal act with respect to the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 abuts on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a is attached. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It is like this.

Further, the terminal board box 870 includes a pair of shaft portions 875a on a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 on the side of the shaft portion 875a of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Since an impact wall 875c having a length that spans between them is provided and the impact wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like can be inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to perform fraudulent activity and reducing the deterrent force. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, in a state in which the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector, it is illegal to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are separated from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the space between the pachinko machine 1 and the tip of the illegal tool enters the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal board 874. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

Further, when the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board are arranged in the direction along the front surface (the back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece portion of the base 871 and the 871c are arranged in the direction of the rear surface (the surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since each of the impact walls 875c of the box cover 875 is present, a multi-layered defense wall is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. By analogy, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is allowed to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal board is not bent. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the 874, and reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and an opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through hole 875b on the pivotally supported side to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are axially supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and an unauthorized tool is allowed to enter, the unauthorized wall 875c prevents the unauthorized tool from connecting terminals. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then the connection terminal board cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c, even if an attempt is made to insert a driver or the like between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted and a gap can be prevented from being formed, and fraudulent acts can be made difficult and deterrence can be enhanced.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, an illegal act is attempted. Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 is covered. The needle-shaped electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the terminals of the connected wiring cords, and high crime prevention capability. Can be one.

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e that holds the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c is extended to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform fraud, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It is possible to keep the protection of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such as.

Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or has the CR unit connection terminal board 874 itself been replaced with an unauthorized tool? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. Since it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts and to detect fraudulent acts, it is possible to hesitate to perform fraudulent acts against those who perform fraudulent acts, and enhance deterrence against fraudulent acts. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface side of the main body frame 5 such that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 faces the operator (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal board 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are the peripheral control section 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the door frame. 5 is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, the respective decorative boards, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals are directed from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side.

The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are covered with the relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 63. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side are exposed to the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

In addition, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362 of the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side, a loan remaining display portion 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500. This is for relaying the connection between the 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90(A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover taken apart and seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body portion 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the rear cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a rear cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and the rear cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908. 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking port 922 that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in a rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a slot 923b of the guide member 923, which is inserted from the rear side of the main body 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 923 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. And a holding member 925. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923 a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disc-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw part 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall off from the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening member 924 protruding to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 that is inserted from the rear side to the front side of the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw part 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 that is locked in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. When the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example does not remove the fastening member 924 even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, the fastening and fastening can be easily performed only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. The back cover 900 can be released, and the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified and maintainability can be improved.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a connection cutout 910 that is cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower end of the main body 902 on the right side in a front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connection cutout 910 in a front view. 912, and a confirmation cutout 914 that is cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 5, this back cover 900 is in a state of being closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 through the connection notch 910. Is facing the rear side. Further, the back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the check opening 912 and faces the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the cutout portion 914. Accordingly, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

In addition, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 of the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at a position slightly leftward from the center when viewed from the front, and are wide and extend long in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows in the left-right direction at predetermined intervals. These through holes 918 are the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4 in a state where the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the device, so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. Has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Therefore, when the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is guided by the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from falling off.

Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been fastened at a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. Since it can be held near the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is configured to extend at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be directly positioned in the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a can be securely attached to the back cover fastening hole 780b in a correct state. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and at the same time, the holding member 925. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by a gap between the guide member 923 and the long hole 923b.

Further, a housing recess for housing the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 is inserted. When the fastening member 924 is fastened to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 can be brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of a defect. In addition to being able to do so, it can improve the appearance.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion so as to be screwed with the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is possible to fasten by simply pulling as compared with the engagement by the locking claw. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove because the back cover 900 cannot be removed, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Furthermore, since the guide member 923 is flexible and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, or move the male screw portion 924 straightly with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

In addition, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900 with the locking opening. Since it is elastically locked to the 922, the tip end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923, which is movably attached, extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923a can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the front end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. Is further provided with a plurality of engaging pieces 908 for engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the rear cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3 so that the fastening member 924 is fastened. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 at only one place, and the work such as assembling and maintenance. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening members 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the body frame 3. Therefore, only by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the fastening by the fastening members 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the labor required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side crime prevention plate]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the drawing, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a U-shape that is shallow in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaging with the positioning recessed portion 1119 of the game board 4.

The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a side plate piece 952a extending substantially in the vertical direction and having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600, and a front-rear direction having a substantially constant depth. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap behind the front end piece 952b and having a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front side from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d that extends longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction when viewed (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d and the front constituent member 1110 in the game board 4. The left side of the game panel 1150 as viewed from the front is inserted (see FIG. 106).

In the side crime prevention plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In the side crime prevention plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 causes the shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 to support the shaft supporting side plate. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the letter-like protrusion 166, and prevents a tool for performing an illegal act from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 106). Further, the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength/rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 is enhanced, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be enhanced to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

As described above, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped shaft-supporting side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted in the U-shaped side. Since it is in a state of being sandwiched by the projecting pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotal-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the pivotal support side of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 by contact, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented, which can prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being easily distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the crime prevention side plate 950 on the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5 (axial support side) is made of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. It is possible to favorably prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread even if it is gouged by another tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the front-rear direction dimension of the side piece 952a becomes longer. Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the crime prevention side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and the crime prevention side plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and fraudulent. ..

Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extruded mold material, the crime prevention side plate 950 (main body 952) having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, and it is possible to reduce defects such as a decrease in strength occurring during processing as compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The crime prevention side plate 950 can be made as small as possible and has high durability and strength.

[1-3I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93(A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as seen from the front. Also, FIG. 94(A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94(B) is a sliding rod for a glass door and a main body frame which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. FIG. 4C is a rear perspective view showing the above, and FIG. Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device after disassembling it, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding lever for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from approximately the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 68. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in an upper part of a front end right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, a lock locking hole 621 formed in a lower part, and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. Tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001 are provided.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base body 1001 has a lateral width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device in which a base body formed to have an L-shaped cross section is integrated. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, which further increases the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

The U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts against the lock device 1000 from the outside.

In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side) thereof. A hook through opening 1002, a screw stopper 1003 projecting outward from the top and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw stopper. An upper end portion and an intermediate portion on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projecting portion 1003 is provided, and the front end project from the lower ends of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 603 of the main body frame base 600 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other when the screw locking portion 603 is moved upward after being inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attaching portion 625 via the interlocking screw.

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003, but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described below and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, lower and middle sides are provided with the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole. Since the structure is such that the locking device 1000 is inserted into the main body frame 621 for positioning and locking, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw, the lock device 1000 can be constructed with an extremely simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having an extremely thin width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear fixing structure is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front side locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling, as compared with the case where the locking device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is close to.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it while the body frame sliding rod 1050 is stored, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper ends of the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower locations of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower ends of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved upward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof cutout portion 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion to the side, and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are attached with screws 1012 so that the upper and lower portions are two positions. A mounting hole 1014 bored in and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower portion of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that biases the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and a side escape hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Equipped with.

The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire, thereby tampering with the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is adapted to be attached by a lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006.

Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 on the plate-shaped surface thereof, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted therein. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to the outer periphery of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 in the front upper diagonal direction so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 is provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97B (clockwise rotation in FIG. 97B).

Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes from the outer periphery of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restriction protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that penetrate through the restriction protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. In addition, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

In addition, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed in the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base body 1001. You can do it. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second tampering prevention member 1032 connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 is formed of a plate material having an inverted "te" shape, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. The second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the lower inside of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 that project toward the front at three locations in the upper, lower, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600 (see FIGS. 63 and 68, etc.). The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the can be locked. It should be noted that the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet elongated hole 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, a guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 which is inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is attached to the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the raising operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that has penetrated the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with the rivet elongated hole 1042. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is configured such that the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, it is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at the upper end portion for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 causes the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like this.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the pivot movement of the engagement cam 1016 causes the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame to ascend. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief cutout portion 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction larger than the tampering prevention cutout portion 1007 at the rear of the lower portion of the vertical side. The escape notch portion 1049 interferes with the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, Equipped with. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of one vertically long metal plate as in the conventional case, and is made of a metal including an upper hook member 1051 and a lower hook member 1052 having hook portions 1054 and 1065. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently housed in the narrow space of the U-shaped base body 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating in a lateral direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

Further, the rivet oblong hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet oblong hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1040 are inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet for penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The long hole 1061, the downward engaging hole 1062 arranged below the long hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward. Further, the rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 descends the body frame sliding rod 1050 by the rotating operation. Is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the second engaging projection 1018 when the second engaging projection 1018 is rotated. The distal end of the can form a movable space. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding blade for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the moving rod 1050.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without backlash.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped with each other. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main body frame. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the long holes for rivet 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 to the 1029 with a screw (not shown) and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057 to form the door. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is hung over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second improper prevention. The member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement projection portion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is also inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

As described above, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attaching portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 forming the locking structure of the front part is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall part 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while the rear part is fixed. Since the screw fastening portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b contacting the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 96(A). In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are engaged with the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is rotated in a direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96(B). The tip of the first engaging projection 1017 is engaged with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and to connect with this. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 96A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the inclined portions of the upper sides of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hooks 1054, 1065 upward claws and the closing plates 24, 25 are again locked, and the main body frame slide is performed. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96(C), The tip of the second engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

Note that when the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame becomes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward by abutting the upper end of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. A door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to reliably lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. You are unable to perform any act.

As described above, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the locking device 1000 of the present example does not engage in a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. You can't. The first of the structures for preventing such fraud is a locking mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the urging force of the spring 1035 causes the first tampering prevention member 1023 to rotate counterclockwise, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tampering prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 tampering prevention notch. It is in a state of engaging with an engaging cutout portion 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to unlock the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engaging protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engaging protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement cutout 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are released, and the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Therefore, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1023. The positional relationship with 1032 is almost the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. 97(A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97(A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not interfere with the closing of the main body frame 3. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming a case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 are pulled down. Since this prevents illicit tools from entering the enclosed space, the structure is such that illicit acts cannot be performed easily.

As described above, the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a door frame sliding rod 1040 inside the U-shaped base body 1001 whose lateral width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device integrated in the L-shaped base body. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely increased and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the inside The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. It is impossible to easily carry out an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three positions on the upper, lower and middle sides of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with screws by using a screw, the structure is extremely simple. With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

In the lock device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attaching piece 1008 and a cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 are provided near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 that attaches the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. A structure may be adopted in which lock mounting holes that are screwed through the piece 1008 are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base body (lock base body), and a door frame slide rod 1040 and a main body frame slide rod are placed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a first side wall 540. The structure may be such that 1050 is housed, and the same effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (forward and backward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The award ball tank 720 storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls discharged from the award ball tank 720 are aligned to form a rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side, and game balls released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and a rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball device 740, which is partially attached to the rear side, and the side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is substantially the same as the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. Since the transparent back cover 900 arranged in a plane is provided, the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900 and the like. The pachinko machine 1 has a side surface that can be visually recognized and can easily inspect (visually inspect) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. be able to.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be seen. Even when tools such as a driver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt are left between the game board 4 and the back cover 900 when the game board 4 is detached from the front side of the 601 and the game machine 4 is removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of some trouble due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an unauthorized device or tool for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it is possible to easily find out, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts are performed, and it is possible to easily find out an illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 can be hesitant to attach an unauthorized device or the like, and has a high deterrent against illegal acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4, or the game board 4 is used. It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is laid down can be made as low as possible to have a flat shape. The attachment work for attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be facilitated.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the rearward projection, it is possible to catch or abut other members in the installed island equipment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of trouble. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a buffer material having a simple shape can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the stacking efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 and the like, so the game board It is possible to make the rear side of No. 4 and the like easier to see, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and control can be prevented from becoming instable due to heat, the control of the game becoming unstable, and the deformation of members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Further, the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size that the game balls cannot pass through. Therefore, for example, even if the game balls spill on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the game balls pass through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 102(A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in the game board in a state where it is attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like as seen from the front, and FIG. 104 is a game as seen from the back of FIG. 103. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 taken in the vertical direction.

As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment defines the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500, and the outer shape is a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface of the game machine 1100 and controls a game content performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180, which is capable of displaying the game status and is visibly attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, is provided. Although not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and described later in detail, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, it is further provided (see FIGS. 108 to 115, etc.).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by the front component member 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 of this example is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side in the front view toward the left in a clockwise direction along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction in a front view, and passes through an upper end in the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to an obliquely upper right portion. An inner rail 1112 that is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. Of the game area 1100 at the boundary portion between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1112, and the stop portion 1114 to which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 can be brought into contact with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111. From the upper end of the inner rail 1112, which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 and which is arranged at the lowermost end and is lowered toward the rear, and the upper end of the inner rail 1112. Only the closed position extending upward and the open position in which the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front can be rotated and can be returned to the closed position side. And a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown).

When the gaming board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is adapted to be located on an extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launching device 650. By jumping over the space, it can be driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is installed. , By turning to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is hit strongly with the ball launch device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by bringing the game ball into contact with this stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received in the starting openings 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the table unit 2000 which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, by the out-port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, it is guided to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the out-port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, and from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed. When it falls, it is received in the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to improve wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball and to allow the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is mitigated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

In addition, the front component 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention protrusion 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially vertical center along the inner rail 1113 from the lower side of the outlet guide surface 1115. A rail-shaped crime prevention groove 1118 that extends to the front end and is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component member 1110 overlaps with the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. As a result, even if an injustice tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the injustice tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. You can't.

Further, in the front component member 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime projection 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. In addition, the post-crime prevention protrusion 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (the side opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even in the inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention rear projection piece 182, a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the inside of the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is arranged at the left end in the front view in the vertical direction and is spaced apart in the vertical direction, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 that are recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end, and are separated in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 that are arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 that is arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 when viewed from the front, is opened downward, and is formed in an arcuate shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage notch 1122, which is a rectangular notch extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recessed portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to the positioning member 956 attached inside the side surface crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 in front view. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, so that the game board stopper 1120 can be attached to the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

In addition, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a state in which the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is seen in a front view. When it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It is like this. Further, the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, so that the game board 4 holds the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

Further, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center of the lower side of the through hole 1123 in the left-right direction to the left in front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate paper sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in front view to stick a certificate stamp for certifying confirmation are provided. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 has a predetermined fastening band in a fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame when the game board is attached to the conventional body frame. By winding and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right in front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing the game panel 1150, the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 can be held between them. In addition, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at a lower portion in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front end on the left side in the front view at the lower end. And a downward opening of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction through the ball passage cutout 1152 of the same shape as the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the lower right corner in front view. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted is provided.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the attachment bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower portion, and positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 in which a rear surface side of the out port 1151 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front and the lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch portion 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, the game area 1100 in the front is Within the corresponding range, a plurality of obstacle nails are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the front unit 2000 is attached. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the outlet 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and when assembled on the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component member 1110. The game ball guided to the rear by the out-out guide surface 1115 thus entered enters the out-hole 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box-like shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the up-down direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at approximately the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the top surface of the bottom wall portion has the out-ball discharging portion 1161. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and are discharged (discharged) from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and are supplied (discharged) to the bottom surface of the substrate holder 1160. It is adapted to be discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. It should be noted that the out-ball discharging section 1161 is located directly above the discharging-ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All of the game balls discharged from are passed through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The substrate holder 1160 also includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 that project forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are designed so that the tip ends are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520, and are fitted with the rear ends of the attachment bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. With the boss 1126 fitted, a predetermined screw is threaded from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126 to attach the substrate holder 1160 to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 while being assembled.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side, and a fixing portion 1163 at the rear end of the rear surface of the rear wall portion. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 is arranged so as to face the 1163, and has a locking portion 1164 that can be locked from the rear side. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 by the fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 whose rear side is opened, and a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 which covers the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be fitted is provided, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear surface side is provided at the front end of the board cover 1171. In addition, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and is fixed to the fixing piece 1174 that fits into the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and the right end of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the rear. An elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 is provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right and left ends in a rear view by sandwiching the elastic fixing pieces 1175, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing part 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the hermetic seal. A protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same structure as the separating/cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulked and fixed sealing portion 1176 so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. As a result, whether the main control board box 1170 has been opened improperly can be clearly discriminated visually from the outside.

Since the main control board box 1170 is provided with four sealing parts 1176 in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, in the main control board box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and the hermetic seal is cut when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even with this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened/closed, the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified, or the main control board 4100 is replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even so, it is possible to visually confirm it from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent acts from being performed.

Further, the main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-back direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like are exposed to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f exposed from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and hermetically sealed seal are cleverly worked, the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention performance can be confirmed by visually observing whether the main control board 4100 has been tampered with or not. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, and the display unit 1181 disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side and the front component member 1110. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 102A, the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example displays a game state that changes depending on the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view. A game state indicator 1183 for one LED and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state indicator 1183 for displaying the number of holdings of the game balls to the first starting opening 2101. For the first special symbol memory display 1184, the first special symbol is the first special lottery result which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and is selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2101. The first special symbol display device 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as, and the lottery by receiving the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 arranged diagonally above and right of the first special symbol display device 1185. From the second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result as the second special symbol, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 It is provided with a second special symbol memory display device 1187 for displaying the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2102.

Further, in the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180, the number of reservations relating to the passage of the gate section 2401 by the game balls is arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially above the inner peripheral rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying, and a normal lottery result selected by a game ball that is arranged below the normal symbol storage display and passes through the gate portion 2401 is displayed as a normal symbol. Normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for, and the diagonal right upper side of the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" big winning opening A round display 1190 including two LEDs for displaying the number of times the opening/closing pattern 2103 is repeated (the number of rounds).

The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED whose red, green, and orange colors can be changed, and the color of the emitted light and the lighting and blinking. Depending on the combination, it is possible to display various game states (for example, probability variation state, time reduction state, probability variation short time state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.).

Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2101. In this case, the start of variable display is displayed as a hold number (memory number) of the first special symbol that has been held (stored). This first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of a predetermined LED, and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, lighting of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b.・The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Lights together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102. In this case, the start of variable display is held (stored) and the number of held (memorized) second special symbols is displayed. This second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b consisting of a predetermined LED, lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b.・The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the second special symbol storage display lamp 1187a, Both 1187b light up, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b are Both are designed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery that is selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after changing for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and is stopped by the light-emitting pattern (special pattern) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

Further, the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red/green/orange color LED that is capable of changing its luminescent color. As a result, it is possible to display the normal lottery result that is drawn by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2401. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189 is, like the special symbol, after the variable display for a predetermined time, is stopped and displayed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180, when the normal symbol can not be variably displayed in the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2401, the start of variable display is suspended. The number of stored (memorized) ordinary symbols is displayed. This normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four variable display of the normal symbols are reserved (stored).

Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a 10-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b each made of a predetermined LED. By turning on each lamp, the round in the "big hit" game is played. The number can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 102(A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. Moreover, the game state display 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol storage The display device 1188, the normal pattern display device 1189, and the round display device 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 195). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150, the function The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by a clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 configured by 7-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are respectively configured by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as the above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 are configured by eight LED groups, so 7 Compared with the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming uncomfortable during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be made more entertaining by devoting it to the movable effect and effect image.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

The game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or glass or metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary amount that can be sufficiently held even if an unillustrated obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has a thickness (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. Equipped with. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 each having an indented front side at both ends of an upper side and a lower side thereof. The engagement step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, as will be described in detail later, the panel plate 1210 has a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the attacker unit 2100, the center accessory 2500, etc., and the attacker 1215 from the front side thereof. The unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed (see FIG. 133 and the like).

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board described above (in this example, approximately 20 mm) and made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1220 holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner, and has a holding step portion 1221 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and inside the holding step portion 1221 is approximately the same size as the game area 1100. A through hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction is mainly provided.

The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is supposed to be on the same plane as. The front step inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature changes and changes with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be filled in the clearance.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 which engage with the engaging step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends from the front surface of the holding step 1221 to the front side. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed between the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 and the panel. The plate 1210 is configured to extend a predetermined amount along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 toward the upper side (center side) in a state in which a predetermined gap having a size capable of inserting the engagement step 1213 is formed. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 has a mounting boss for the front component member 1110. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount in the front side so as to leave an outer peripheral edge below and slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 has a recessed shape above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height in a state in which the rear surface-side outer peripheral portion projects rearward, and the recessed amount ( Depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) capable of accommodating the flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 113 and the like) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 that is attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable that the distance is between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is fixed to the main frame 3. (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes 1228, which are arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed, in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning projection that protrudes forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in the front flange of the back box 3001 and formed in a flange shape). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) as viewed from the rear.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a large diameter inner hole and a small diameter inner hole are mixed so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixedly mounted. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is designed to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball-striking launcher 650. However, the guide is smooth. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a lightening portion 1230, so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, support them, and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-shaped rib is formed.

In addition, in this panel holder 1220, a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning means such as an obstacle nail implanting device (not shown) and an assembly jig is formed, and the obstacle nail implanting device holds the game panel 1150. It is possible to set it in the state of being. In addition, in the lower portion of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and a lower end penetrating leftward in the front-rear direction in the front-rear direction and downward Is opened to the front passage 1112 of the front component 1110, and the ball passage notch 1123 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122, and the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1232 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front and a lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 104 ). The member 1110 is provided with a notch portion 1236 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes for attaching and fixing the panel holder 1220 to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out-ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is provided on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board placing portion 606 of the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to fit with the positioning protrusion 607 provided, and the outboard discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, so that the game board 4 relatively moves in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is becoming regulated.

In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 on the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device without modifying the planting device, and suppress an increase in cost for planting the faulty nail. You can do it.

Although not shown in the figure, the game panel 1200 of this example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. In addition, the front unit 2000 can be attached. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel plate 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200 even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and it is a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 is visible to the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 in which the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like change depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by only replacing the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, it is possible to make the panel holder 1220 a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of various members so as to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-5. Security mechanism for pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is accommodated.

First, as shown in FIG. 106, the crime prevention structure on the pivotal support side of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the pivotal support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcement unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension thereof is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 are combined. The side-face crime prevention plate 950 includes a plate-shaped side piece 952a that extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end that extends from the front end of the side-side piece 952a to a substantially perpendicular direction inner side (open side). A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side surface piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and a substantially inward direction inward from the rear end of the side surface piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The height of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the like can be favorably supported.

On the other hand, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by using spot welding, rivets or the like, as described above, using a plurality of elongated metal plates. On the outer side of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft-supporting side, a shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross-section opening to the outside (shaft-supporting side) is provided. In the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 has a higher strength due to the shaft-supporting side U-shaped protruding piece 166, and the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft supporting side is provided. If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is generated. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950 are provided. The rear side piece of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 formed in the substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is adapted to be inserted (entered), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. It is configured to be sandwiched by the side U-shaped protrusions 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the shaft supporting side from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened and the main body frame. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 to the door 3.

Since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and the rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a of the crime prevention side plate 950 extends rearward of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, the body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is temporarily assumed. Even if is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150), and an illegal act is performed. Can be surely prevented. As shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plates 12 of the outer frame 2 are in contact with each other so as to cover the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface, and the side surface side It is able to fully counter the vandalism of. In addition, generally, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it becomes almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the side piece 952c from the rear end, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, as shown in FIG. 107, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full-tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 are replaced by the game board 4. It can be seen from the rear side of the body frame 3 without removing the body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found and an unauthorized act can be prevented. Further, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device, and the deterrence against the illegal action can be enhanced. ing.

Further, from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and therefore the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. Even when tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt are left between the main frame 3 and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is removed from and attached to the outside It is possible to easily find out from the above, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed composition of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114. 108 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board showing the second attacker unit in an easy-to-see manner, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board seen obliquely from the front right, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as seen obliquely from behind. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and seen from an oblique rear. It is a figure.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and when a player operates the handle device 500, a game ball (also simply referred to as a “sphere”) as a game medium is generated. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and the game window 101 of the door frame 5 from the game window 101 to the player side when the front component member 1110 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front view. A function display unit 1180 arranged at a visible position, and a plurality of function display units 1180 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrating in a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the front-rear direction. And a plate-shaped game panel 1200 having an opening 1215 (see FIG. 113 and the like) and defining the rear end of the game area 1100.

The game panel 1200 of this example is a transparent panel plate 1210 that is plate-shaped and has a smaller outer shape than the front component member 1110 and that can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110. A panel holder 1220, which holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110, is provided. The opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in the transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, on the game panel 1200 of this example, a decorative sticker 1102 having a pattern according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front side of the transparent panel plate 1210 (see FIG. 113). The decorative seal 1102 is formed with an opening 1102a which penetrates a large amount by a predetermined amount (for example, 0.2 mm to 1 mm) with respect to the outer diameter of the obstacle nail G planted on the panel plate 1210. The decorative seal 1102 is prevented from coming into contact with it. By the way, when a contraction difference occurs between the decorative seal 1102 and the panel plate 1210 due to temperature change, aging change, or the like, the decorative seal 1102 is pulled or pushed by the obstacle nail G moving together with the panel plate 1210. Although the decorative seal 1102 may be wrinkled and may not look good, since the decorative seal 1102 is provided with the opening 1102a having a diameter larger than that of the obstacle G, only the gap between the opening 1102a and the obstacle G is present. It is possible to avoid contact with the obstacle nail G and avoid being pulled or pushed, and it is possible to prevent wrinkles from occurring on the decorative seal 1102 due to temperature changes, aging changes, and the like. The appearance of the game panel 1200 (in the game area 1100) can be maintained in a good state.

The decorative sticker 1102 is applied to a transparent film so that the pattern or the like is partially transparent, and the decoration of the ball guiding unit 3060 in the rear unit 3000 arranged on the rear side through the transparent portion. The members 3064 and 3065, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600, and the like can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 109). Further, since the decorative sticker 1102 is provided so that the pattern or the like has a light-transmitting property as described above, the back left decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 and the back left decoration member 3704 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 and the like. By emitting light in a plane, it is possible to emit light as if the pattern were self-luminous. As a result, the pattern (decoration sticker 1102) of the game panel 1200 that divides the rear end of the game region 1100 emits light, so that the pattern (game region 1100) can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest is strongly drawn. The pachinko machine 1 can be attached.

Further, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a back side of the back unit 3000. A liquid crystal display device 1900 that is visibly attached from the player side and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image; A main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

The table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the upper left side of the attacker unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2100 arranged on the upper side of the outlet 1151 in the lower part of the game area 1100. The front left movable effect unit 2300, the gate member 2400 arranged on the upper left side of the front left movable effect unit 2300, slightly to the left from the vertical center in the game area 1100, and arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500.

Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and has an open front side, and a rear box 3001 in which an opening 3001c facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed in the rear wall 3001b. And a rear upper left decoration unit 3050 which is arranged near the front surface in the back box 3001 above the opening 3001c in the left corner in a front view and is capable of light emission decoration; , A ball guiding unit 3060 that guides the game balls received by the front unit 2000 downward, a back inside movable production unit 3100 attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b in the back box 3001, and a back inside movable in the back box 3000. Rear back movable production unit 3200 arranged on the upper side and front side of the production unit 3100, front back movable production unit 3400 arranged on the front side of the back rear movable production unit 3200, and a ball guiding unit in the back box 3000. The rear lower back movable effect unit 3500 disposed between the 3060 and the rear middle movable effect unit 3100, the lower back movable effect unit 3600 attached to the front side of the ball guiding unit 3060, and the opening 3001c of the back box 3000. It is provided with a back left movable effect unit 3700 arranged on the front side of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 on the left side.

The back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 has a substantially rectangular opening 3001c penetrating in the front-rear direction in the rear wall 3001b. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 having a peripheral control section 4140 and a liquid crystal control section 4150 is provided, which will be described in detail later. There is.

[2-1. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the rear.

The table unit 2000 on the game board 4 is an attacker unit 2100, which is arranged above the outlet 1151 at the lower center of the left and right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210), and an attacker unit 2100. Of the front left movable effect unit 2300 which is arranged on the upper left side of the game area 1100 and extends from the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the center side in the left-right direction, and on the upper side of the table left movable effect unit 2300, slightly to the left of the vertical center in the game area 1100. It is provided with a gate member 2400 which is arranged and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is arranged substantially at the center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150.

The attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail later, but a first starting port 2101 in which a game ball can be always received, and a gate portion of the gate member 2400 arranged below the first starting port 2101. A second starting port 2102 that allows the game ball to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing the game ball through 2401 and a first starting port 2101 that is arranged below the second starting port 2102. A special winning opening 2103 in which the game balls can be received in accordance with the special lottery result obtained by receiving the game balls in the second starting opening 2102, and two on each of the left and right sides above the special winning opening 2103. It is provided with four general winning openings 2104 which are arranged and are capable of accepting game balls at all times.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 in the table unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is an object located on the left and right sides of the special winning opening 2103 and in front of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a player playing with the pachinko machine 1). Is provided with a pair of projector units 2150 (2150L, 2150R) for projecting a predetermined image. The projector unit 2150 is configured so that the light to be emitted (projected) does not easily enter the visual field of the player.

Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is formed so as to become lower as it goes to the right in a front view, and the game ball flowing down in the game area 1100 is a game area 1100. A shelf portion 2301a that can be guided to the center side in the left-right direction is provided. The front left movable effect unit 2300, which will be described in detail later, is provided with three ornaments 2302, 2303, 2304 imitating a lantern on the lower side of the shelf 2301a, and can be swung according to the game state. You can do it. The front left movable effect unit 2300 is formed so as to form a pair with the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500.

Further, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 is provided with a gate portion 2401 having a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and a gate sensor for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2401. 2402 is provided.

Further, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a large opening 1215 formed substantially in the center of the panel plate 1210, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side is visually recognized from the player side. It is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be formed. In this center accessory 2500, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 are prevented from entering the frame. A peripheral wall portion 2503, a warp inlet 2504 that opens at a predetermined position of the peripheral wall portion 2503, a warp outlet 2505 that discharges a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and a game ball that is discharged from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction. After that, the stage 2510 which is released into the game area 1100 and then returned to the game area 1100 is provided.

In addition, as will be described later in detail, the center accessory 2500 is an object detection unit 2530 capable of detecting an object located on the front side (player side) of the game area 1100, and in a front view from the substantially upper center in the left-right direction. A logo decoration unit 2540 arranged along the arc-shaped outer periphery to the right, a second attacker unit 2550 arranged below the logo decoration unit 2540 and on the right side of the stage 2510, and below the second attacker unit 2550. And a front right movable effect unit 2600 arranged so as to form a pair with the front left movable effect unit 2300.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the attacker unit, and FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit seen from the lower rear side. 119 is a front view of the attacker unit (a), and FIG. 119 is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). Further, FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing a projection area by the projector unit of the attacker unit.

The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed in the lower left-right center of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and then the game panel. It is fixed to the front surface of 1200 (panel plate 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of inlets (winning holes) in which the game balls hit in the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the first starting port 2101 arranged on the uppermost side in the substantially center in the left-right direction, the second starting port 2102 arranged below (immediately below) the first starting port 2101, and the second starting port. A rectangular special winning opening 2103 arranged below (immediately below) 2102 and extending to the left and right more than the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and a large winning opening at a position higher than the big winning opening 2103. It is provided with a total of four general winning openings 2104, two on each of the left and right sides of 2103.

The first starting port 2101 of this attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, and game balls can be always accepted (winning). On the other hand, the second starting port 2102 arranged below the first starting port 2101 is, as shown in the figure, a pair of blade-shaped movable pieces 2105 arranged substantially upright on both left and right sides of the second starting port 2102. By this, the state between the first starting port 2101 is closed, and in the state shown in the figure, the game ball is in a state of being unacceptable to the second starting port 2102. The pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second starting port 2102 are rotatably supported at the lower end side, and the upper end side is rotated in a direction away from each other to expand the second starting port. A game ball can be received in 2102. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning port formed by the pair of movable pieces 2105.

Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally elongated rectangular opening/closing member 2106 capable of closing the opening. The opening/closing member 2106 is rotatably supported about a substantially lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the special winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side is forward. By rotating so as to move, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be received. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening formed by the opening/closing member 2106.

This attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction of the first starting port 2101 that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and has a size (width) that allows each game ball to be received. In addition, the second starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in a direction in which they are separated from each other and expanded to be three times the outer shape of the game ball. The width is ~5 times. Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening/closing member 2106 is in the open state, which is 5 to 8 times the outer shape of the game ball. As a result, in a state in which each of the winning openings 2101, 1022, and 2103 can be received, the lower the winning opening is, the easier it is to receive the game ball.

Further, the four general winning openings 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 are in a state of opening upward on the left and right sides of the special winning opening 2103, respectively, and are arranged at a higher position as they are farther from the special winning opening 2103. The first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103 are arranged substantially symmetrically with respect to an axis connecting the centers in the left-right direction.

More specifically, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and has a first starting opening 2101 and a special winning opening 2103 at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction. Then, a plate-shaped base plate 2110 capable of forming the second starting opening 2102 and the general winning opening 2104, and a pair of movable pieces 2105 attached to the lower front surface of the first starting opening 2101 in the base plate 2110 can be rotated. A central receiving member 2111 which is pivotally supported and which forms a second starting port 2102 and whose upper and rear sides are opened, and a general winning port 2104 which is opened upward are formed on the left and right front faces of the large winning port 2103 on the base plate 2110. Four side receiving members 2112 which are attached and whose upper and rear sides are opened are provided.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, pivotally supports an opening/closing member 2106 for opening/closing the special winning opening 2103, and rotationally drives a pair of movable pieces 2105 and the opening/closing member 2106. The attacker drive unit 2120 to be operated and a predetermined object (for example, a player) that is attached to the left and right sides of the attacker drive unit 2120 on the rear side of the base plate 2110 and is located in front of the attacker unit 2100 (on the player side). And a pair of projector units 2150 capable of projecting an image.

The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction and has a shallow relief-like decoration on its surface. This base plate 2110 has an opening 2110a which is sized to pass through the game ball in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second starting port 2102. In addition, the base plate 2110 is provided with a gutter portion 2110b that extends backward from the position where the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 are formed and can guide the game ball. Further, the base plate 2110 is formed at a position lower than the general winning opening 2104 between the two general winning openings 2104 arranged on both the left and right sides of the big winning opening 2103, and the front end lens of the projector unit 2150 is formed. It has a circular lens opening 2110c that faces it.

The center receiving member 2111 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2000 is formed in a fan shape whose front surface bulges upward. Although not shown in detail, the central receiving member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions that extend rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the widths of the openings 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable piece 2105 can be rotatably supported by these shaft portions.

Further, the four side receiving members 2112 have a disk-shaped front surface, and are formed in a gutter shape in which the upper side and the rear side are open.

Further, the attacker driving unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 includes a starting opening solenoid 2121 for driving the pair of movable pieces 2105 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2102, and a rear side of the base plate 2110 supporting the starting opening solenoid 2121. A starter drive mechanism base 2123 attached to the player, an attacker solenoid 2124 for opening/closing the opening/closing member 2106 for closing the special winning opening 2103, and an attacker solenoid 2124 are supported and the opening/closing member 2106 is rotatably supported. , The attacker drive mechanism base 2126 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 below the starter drive mechanism base 2123, and the game ball received in the second starter 2102 supported at a predetermined position of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A second starting opening sensor 2127 for detecting, a count sensor 2128 for detecting a game ball that is supported at a different position from the second starting opening sensor 2127 and received in the special winning opening 2103, and supported on the upper surface of the attacker driving mechanism base 2126. A starter solenoid 2121, an attacker solenoid 2124, a second starter sensor 2127, and an attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100 are provided.

Although not shown, the starting opening solenoid 2121 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is biased in a protruding direction by a coil spring, and is below the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. The plunger is supported by the starting opening drive mechanism base 2123 at the rear position of the so as to project forward. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the starting opening solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2121 retracts against the urging force of the coil spring, and the pair of movable pieces is moved through the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other, and the second starting port 2102 is opened.

In addition, the starting opening driving mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so that the starting opening solenoid 2121 can be accommodated and supported from the front side, and is received on the upper surface by the first starting opening 2101 and the gutter of the base plate 2110. The first guiding portion 2123a that guides the game ball that has circulated through the portion 2110b backward and the game ball that is formed below the portion that supports the starting opening solenoid 2121 and that is received by the second starting opening 2102 are guided downward. A second guide portion (detailed illustration thereof is omitted).

Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2124 in the attacker drive unit 2120 has a plunger that can be moved forward and backward by energization and is biased in a projecting direction by a coil spring, like the starting opening solenoid 2121. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the attacker solenoid 2124 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2124 sinks, and the upper end of the opening/closing member 2106 moves relatively forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. As described above, the special winning opening 2103 is opened.

In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 are always in a state capable of accepting game balls. On the other hand, in the second starting opening 2102, a pair of movable members are driven by energizing the starting opening solenoid 2121 according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2401 in the gate member 2400 described later. The piece 2105 is opened so that it can be received. In addition, in the special winning opening 2103, depending on the special lottery result that is drawn by the game balls being received (starting winning) in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (for example, the special lottery result is a “big hit”). When the attacker solenoid 2124 is energized, the opening/closing member 2106 is opened/closed in a predetermined pattern to be receivable.

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 includes a special winning opening decoration substrate 2131 which is supported on a lower portion of the attacker driving mechanism base 2126 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, so that the inside of the special winning opening 2103 can be illuminated and decorated. It has become.

The two projector units 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 include a light-transmitting mounting base 2151 mounted on the rear side of the base plate 2110, and a substantially cylindrical projector main body 2152 mounted on the mounting base 2151 from the rear side. , An attacker-side decorative substrate 2153 mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2151 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a cover which covers the rear side of the attacker-side decorative substrate 2153 and the projector body 2152 and is mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2151. 2154 and.

As shown in FIG. 119(b), the projector main body 2152 of the projector unit 2150 is arranged at the rear part of the main body and is capable of radiating light forward 2156 (in this example, a high brightness white LED is used). And a plurality of lens groups 2157 arranged on the front side of the light source unit 2156, and an image film 2158 arranged at a predetermined position in the lens group 2157 and showing an image to be projected. The projector unit 2150 can project the image drawn on the image film 2158 on an object located in the projection range in front of the projector unit 2150 by causing the light source unit 2156 to emit light. ing.

In this example, the optical axes of the left and right projector units 2150R and 2510L do not intersect each other, so that images can be projected at different positions. In addition, in this example, the optical axis of the projector unit 2150 is set so that an image is projected on the projection region TR from both shoulders to both chests for the player who is normally seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. (See FIG. 120).

In this attacker unit 2100, the game balls received in the first starting opening 2101 and the four general winning openings 2104 are passed to the passage hole 3061a of the unit base 3061 and the general discharge passage 3061b in the ball guiding unit 3060 of the back unit 3000 described later. It will be sent.

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 is also configured to discharge downward after the game ball received in the second starting port 2102 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. ing. Further, in the attacker unit 2100, the game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is discharged downward after being detected by the count sensor 2128.

In the attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged such that the plunger 2124a moves forward and backward, and the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged at a position as close to the opening/closing member 2106 as possible. Therefore, the dimension of the attacker unit 2100 in the front-rear direction can be shortened by 5 to 30% as compared with the conventional product, and a wider rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured. ..

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 of this example uses two projector units 2150 to position an object located outside the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) (for example, another pachinko machine that is arranged on the opposite side of a player or a game hall). Machine, wall, etc.), it is possible to project and display the effect image, and it is possible to provide the player with a novel image effect that was not possible with conventional pachinko machines, and to attract the player's attention. In addition, it is possible to increase the expectation for the game, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, when the projector unit 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 emits light according to the game state, as shown in FIG. 120, a predetermined image is projected and displayed in the projection region TR extending from the player's shoulder to his arm and chest. However, since it is a position that is difficult for the player to directly notice, a player or the like who does not know the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 will not notice it even if the effect by the projector unit 2150 is started. The game will be continued. On the other hand, since the projection region TR is a region that extends from the player's shoulder to the arm, the image projected from the projector unit 2150 is projected on the front half of the player's shoulder, arm, etc. When viewed from the side, a part of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 becomes visible, so that other players can easily notice the effect (the arrival of opportunity) by the projector unit 2150. Therefore, the other player will notice the arrival of the opportunity earlier than the player himself, and the surroundings of the player will notice the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 only when the player is buzzing. Therefore, not only the player playing the pachinko machine 1 but also other players can increase the expectation for the game, and it becomes easy to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play. You can do it.

Further, since the image is displayed to the player himself by the projector unit 2150, the player can be greatly surprised by presenting an image effect that has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machine, and the player's interest can be enhanced. It is possible to strongly attract the projected image and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with the projected image and the like, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

It should be noted that when a predetermined image is projected and displayed on the player by the projector unit 2150, the light emitting decoration is turned off or dimmed in each of the light emitting decorative units provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4. As a result, a part of the player's body located within the projection area TR illuminated by the light emitted from the projector unit 2150 is reflected on the glass plate 594 of the glass unit 590 of the door frame 5 to be seen by the player. This makes it easier to notice the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150, and the effect by the projector unit 2150 can be enjoyed.

In addition, the object detection means 2530 provided in the center accessory 2500 described below detects the sitting position of the player, and then emits light from the projector unit 2150 (2150L or 2150R) according to the sitting position of the player. Alternatively, the predetermined image can be surely projected by the player.

In addition, the projector unit 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 is configured so that the light source unit 2156 emits light when detecting fraudulent activity.

[2-3. Front left movable production unit]
Next, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. FIG. 121(a) is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 121(b) is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit seen from the rear. Also, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the front left movable effect unit.

The front left movable effect unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center of the game area 1100 on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 on the left side of the center of the game area 1100 in the vertical direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to be in contact with the outer circumference.

The front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example has a shallow box shape in which one side of the front view is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, the outer shape of the front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape, and the front side is opened. Of the unit main body 2301, the lower left first decorative body 2302 which is arranged in the unit main body 2301 and is rotatably supported at the upper end side and formed in a shape imitating a lantern, A lower left second decorative body 2303, which is arranged in the unit main body 2301, is rotatably supported at the upper end side thereof, and is smaller than the lower left first decorative body 2302 in a shape imitating a lantern, and a lower left second decorative body 2303 and A lower left first ornament 2302 and a lower left second ornament 2302 via the movement support mechanism 2320, which is arranged on the rear side of the unit main body 2301 and movably supports the lower left first ornament 2302. The lower left side drive solenoid 2330 for moving and driving the body 2303 and the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 are attached to the rear side and the rear side of the unit main body 2301, and support the movement support mechanism 2320 in cooperation with the unit main body 2301. And a unit base 2304 that

Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 includes an upper base plate 2305 attached to the front side of the unit base 2304 so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the rear end on the upper side of the unit main body 2301, and a rear end on the right side of the unit main body 2301 when viewed from the front. A right base plate 2306 attached to the front side of the unit base 2304 so as to extend rightward from the vicinity, a plate-like decorative member 2307 attached to the front left corner in the unit body 2301, and an upper edge front end of the unit body 2301. And a front upper decoration member 2308 having a predetermined decoration, and a front lower decoration member 2309 attached to a lower corner of the unit main body 2301 and having a predetermined decoration.

Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 includes a left side decoration board 2310 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 2304 on the rear side of the unit body 2301 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a left side on the rear side of the unit body 2301. The left decorative body decorative substrate 2311 is arranged on the front side of the decorative substrate 2310, is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2304, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Reference numeral 2312 in the drawing is a head cover that protects the tip of the plunger that moves forward and backward in the lower left side drive solenoid 2330. Further, the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is attached to the unit base 2304 so that the plunger moves forward and backward from the right side in front view.

The unit main body 2301 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 is formed so that the upper surface formed in a box shape becomes lower as it goes to the right in a front view, and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 is played. It is a shelf portion 2301a that can be guided to the center side in the left-right direction in the region 1100. In addition, the unit main body 2301 has three-dimensional unevenness formed on a box-shaped bottom surface (a surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200), and at least the bottom surface is formed to be transparent. There is. In addition, the unit main body 2301 has an opening 2301b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper portions of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303. The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 arranged on the front side through the opening 2301b of the unit main body 2301 and the moving support mechanism 2320 are connected to each other.

As shown, the movement support mechanism 2320 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 has a lower end side rotatably supported by a unit main body 2301 and a unit base 2304 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper end side lower left first. A rod-shaped rod rotatably supporting the decorative body 2302, and a drive crank 2321 connected to the tip of the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 at approximately the center in the longitudinal direction, and a lower end at the left side of the drive crank 2321 when viewed from the front. A side is rotatably supported by a unit main body 2301 and a unit base 2304 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper end side is a rod-shaped operation link member 2322 rotatably supporting the lower left second decorative body 2303; A connecting member 2323 for connecting the upper end side of the operating link member 2322 and the upper end side of the driving crank 2321 to each other in a rotatable manner so that the operating link member 2322 extends substantially parallel to the driving crank 2321. There is.

The drive crank 2321 of the moving support mechanism 2320 is configured to support and connect the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the connecting member 2323 respectively by one shaft member on the upper end side. Further, similarly to the drive crank 2321, the operation link member 2322 has the lower left second decorative body 2303 and the connecting member 2323 supported and connected by one shaft member on the upper end side. Further, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are formed such that the rotation axis and the axis supporting the decorations 2302 and 2303 have the same distance. When the drive crank 2321 is rotated by the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the movement support mechanism 2320 rotates so that the operating link member 2322 is always parallel to the drive crank 2321 via the connecting member 2323. There is.

In addition, as shown in the figure, in this example, the connecting member 2323 is formed in a shape curved in an arc shape. Although not shown, the front left movable effect unit 2300 is provided with a stopper that restricts the rotation range of the drive crank 2321.

The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 are each formed in a shape imitating a lantern as shown in the drawing, and are also formed in a plate shape. The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are formed to have a light-transmitting property. Although not shown in detail, in the state where the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are assembled as the front left movable effect unit 2300, the lower left first decorative body 2302 is the lower left second decorative body 2303. The lower left side drive solenoid 2330 drives the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 so that they do not come into contact with each other.

The upper base plate 2305 and the right base plate 2306 in the front left movable effect unit 2300 are respectively provided with plate-shaped flange portions 2305a and 2306a capable of contacting the front surface of the game panel 1200. By fixing the flange portions 2305a and 2306a of the upper base plate 2305 and the left base plate 2306 to the front surface of the game panel 1200, the front left movable effect unit 2300 can be attached to the game panel 2300. Further, the upper base plate 2305 and the right base plate 2306 are formed to be translucent.

The left side decorative board 2310 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 emits light from the LED mounted on the front surface, so that the front left lower decorative object 2302 and the lower left second decorative object 2303 are viewed from the front side in the front left movable effect unit 2300. The outer part can also be decorated with light. Further, the left decorative body decoration substrate 2311 is configured such that the LED mounted on the front surface is caused to emit light so that the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 can be illuminated.

Next, the movement of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 in the front left movable effect unit 2300 will be described. In the front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 124(a), in a normal state (when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is not energized), the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are The upper end side is inclined to the right by about 45 degrees from the vertical state, and the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is advanced from the main body.

In a normal state, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are viewed from the front by the load of the lower left first decoration body 2302 and the lower left second decoration body 2303 supported on the upper ends of the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322. Although the force for rotating in the clockwise direction is applied, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are restricted by a stopper not shown so as not to rotate further in the clockwise direction.

From this normal state, when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is energized, the plunger moves leftward in front view, and the drive crank 2321 connected to the tip of the plunger at the center in the longitudinal direction is seen in front view with its lower end side as the center. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive crank 2321 rotates, the operation link member 2322 connected by the connecting member 2323 also rotates in the same direction at the same time as the drive crank 2321. In this example, as shown in FIG. 124(b), even when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is driven (energized) to retract the plunger, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are in the vertical state. On the other hand, the upper end side is inclined to the right when viewed from the front.

Then, when the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 rotate counterclockwise in a predetermined range by the drive of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body supported at their upper ends. The body 2303 also rotates. Since the upper ends of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are rotatably supported (axially supported), when the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 rotate, When the inertial force acts on the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 and the rotational movement stops, the inertial force causes a swaying motion around the upper ends pivotally supported by the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322. It will move.

On the other hand, when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is deenergized while the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is energized (the state of FIG. 124(b)), the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 becomes free. At this time, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 supporting the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are in a state of being tilted rightward in a front view from a state in which the upper end side is vertical, as illustrated. Therefore, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are respectively rotated clockwise in the front view by the loads acting from the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303. The force acts, and the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 rotate in the clockwise direction and automatically return to the position in the normal state.

Then, even when the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 return to the normal state, inertial forces act on the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, respectively, so that they rotate and move. Is stopped, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 sway.

Therefore, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example swings the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 in a swaying manner by appropriately repeating energization and de-energization of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330. It is possible to entertain the movement of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, and the arrival of a chance etc. by swinging the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303. Can be made to suggest to others.

[2-4. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2400 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. The gate member 2400 of the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1215 formed in a position slightly left of the vertical center on the left side of the horizontal center of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200. Thus, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). The gate member 2400 has a gate portion 2401 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a gate sensor 2402 arranged in the gate portion 2401 detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2401. You can do it.

Note that the gate member 2400 of this example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the conventional gate member, and the portion behind the front surface of the game panel 1150 is the thickness of the game panel 1150. It fits inside. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2402 extends from the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

[2-5. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 134. 125 is a front view of the center accessory, FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the center accessory seen from the front, and FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the center accessory seen from the rear. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory that is disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory that is disassembled for each major configuration and then viewed. Further, FIG. 130 is an enlarged front view showing the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 131 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the second attacker unit. Further, FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the front right movable effect unit of the center accessory disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the front right movable effect unit of the center accessory disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the front right movable effect unit in the center accessory.

The center accessory 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1215 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of a transparent plate-shaped panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and then the panel plate 1210. As shown in FIG. 108 and the like, it is provided with a large window portion 2501 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the shape of a frame occupying most of the game area 1100.

In this center accessory 2500, the shape of the outer periphery of the upper frame is linearly inclined at a steep angle linearly on the left side from the substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and after being lowered by a predetermined amount, the shape further becomes gentle toward the left side. It has a plurality of steps that are inclined to. On the other hand, in the center accessory 2500, the outer peripheral shape on the right side of the upper frame is a curved shape (arc shape) substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100. This center accessory 2500 has a right half outer periphery formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 in a front view.

This center accessory 2500 is a plate-shaped flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 with the center of the left and right direction bulging forward from the flange portion 2502 as a boundary. It is provided with a peripheral wall portion 2503 that guides the game ball to the left and right and prevents the game ball from entering the frame. In addition, the center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance 2504 that opens into the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 located on the front side of the panel plate 1210 and into which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter (see FIG. 111). With, the warp exit 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2504 into the frame, and the game ball that is discharged from the warp exit 2505 rolls in the left-right direction, and then into the upper game area 1100 of the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2510 disposed below the lower inner edge of the window 2501 for discharging and circulating.

The stage 2510 in this center accessory 2500 is curved so that both ends in the left-right direction are raised as a whole, and is wavy so that the position corresponding to the substantially center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction is slightly raised. Is formed on. The stage 2510 has a guide surface 2511 and a guide surface 2511 that are formed on the upper surfaces (valleys) that are lower on both sides of the center in the left-right direction and that are inclined so as to spread in the left-right direction and lower toward the front. A front wall 2512 that rises from the front end side lower than the outer diameter of the game ball, and a rear wall 2513 that rises higher than the outer diameter of the game ball from the rear end side are provided. The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2505 can be discharged to the front side (in the game area 1100) through the guide surface 2511.

Further, the center character 2500 is opened to the rear wall 2513 on the rear side at the position of the apex which is slightly higher than the center of the stage 2510 in the left-right direction. It is provided with an entrance 2514 and a chance exit 2515 which is arranged immediately below the chance entrance 2514 below the stage 2510 where the game balls that have entered the chance entrance 2514 can be released, and which opens forward. The game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 is discharged from the chance exit 2515 into the game area 1100. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like, this chance exit 2515 is arranged immediately above the first starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball discharged from the chance exit 2515 is the first with a high probability. The starting port 2101 is accepted (wins).

In this center accessory 2500, substantially the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and the back side rear movable production unit 3500 and the like of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side through the stage 2510 is visually recognized from the player side. You can do it.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes an insertion frame-shaped portion 2506 that projects rearward from the inner peripheral edge side of the frame-shaped flange portion 2502 and is inserted into the opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210. The insertion-frame-shaped portion 2506 constitutes a frame-shaped center body frame 2520.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 closes the window portion 2501 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and a transparent protective plate 2516 (see FIG. 128 and the like) arranged on the rear side of the stage 2510, and a game area 1100 (in the door frame 5). The object detection means 2530 capable of detecting an object located on the front side (player side) of the glass unit 590) and the upper center in the left-right direction within the width of the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the right in a front view. A logo decoration unit 2540 which is arranged along the arc-shaped outer periphery in the direction and indicates the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and a second attacker unit 2550 which is arranged below the logo decoration unit 2540 and on the right side of the stage 2510. A front right movable effect unit 2600, which is arranged below the attacker unit 2550 so as to be symmetrical to the front left movable effect unit 2300, with the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction interposed therebetween, is provided.

This center accessory 2500 has a peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 has a shape substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. In the attached state, a gap slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball is formed from the upper part of the center accessory 2500 to the right side along the outer periphery of the logo decoration unit 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker unit 2550. , By hitting the right, it is possible to easily hit the game ball into the second attacker unit 2550 (second game area 2551). Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1210, a region of a predetermined width is formed between the center region 2500 and the inner periphery of the game region 1100 on the outer periphery on the left side. ..

The object detection means 2530 of the center accessory 2500 includes an upper object detection sensor 2531 arranged at the peripheral edge of the window portion 2501 at substantially the center in the left-right direction and a left object detection arranged at the peripheral edge on the left side of the game window 2501 when viewed from the front. It is provided with a sensor 2532, a right object detection sensor 2533 arranged on the right peripheral edge in the front view of the game window 2501, and a lower object detection sensor 2534 arranged below the right object detection sensor 2533.

The object detection unit 2530 receives a detection light emitted from the light emission unit and a reflection light of the detection light emitted from the light emission unit, which is arranged adjacent to the light emission unit and emits detection light made of invisible light such as infrared rays in a predetermined forward direction. Each of them is provided with a possible light receiving unit, and it is possible to detect a moving player's hand or the like within a predetermined range in front of the game area 1100. Further, the object detecting means 2530 can detect each of the left, right, up, and down directions by the four object detecting sensors 2531, 2532, 2533, 2534, respectively. With the detection signals of 2533 and 2534, it is possible to detect the moving direction and moving speed of the hand and the like. The object detection unit 2530 can be operated at the time of the effect given by the start winning, so that the player can participate in the effect and provide the effect with the player's sense of unity to make the player more enjoyable. It is designed to be used.

This object detection means 2530 enables the detection of each of the object detection sensors 2531, 2532, 2533 in a predetermined game state and moves the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the predetermined direction in front of the game area 1100. Is displayed as an opportunity to perform a predetermined effect by detecting the hand moved by the player in front of the game area 1100, and allowing the player to participate in the effect of the game. It is intended to enhance the interest.

Although not shown in detail, the logo decoration unit 2540 of the center accessory 2500 is translucent and is three-dimensionally shaped so that the characters of the logo are raised, and is placed behind the logo lens. In the center accessory 2500, the diffuser lens member including a plurality of prism-shaped lenses and the transparent logo unit base disposed behind the diffuser lens member and supporting the logo lens and the diffuser lens member are provided. It is attached to the front side of the frame-shaped center body frame 2520. Further, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center body frame 2520 at a position corresponding to the logo decoration unit 2540, and a logo decoration board 2541 on which a plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs) are mounted on the front surface and a logo decoration board 2541. A substrate cover 2542 that covers the rear side of the substrate.

[2-5A. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. The second attacker unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is disposed below the logo decoration unit 2540 at a position adjacent to the lower right side of the window 2501 in a front view. This second attacker unit 2550 has a second game area 2551 in which the game balls flowing down along the outer periphery of the front side of the center main body frame 2520 along the front view right side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 can be distributed, and a second game area. A second special winning opening 2552 arranged at a predetermined position in 2551 and capable of receiving a game ball, a blade-shaped second opening/closing member 2553 capable of opening/closing the second special winning opening 2552, and a second opening/closing member 2553 The second attacker drive mechanism 2560 that rotates according to the state to enable or disable the receipt of the game ball into the second special winning opening 2552 is provided.

Further, the second attacker unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 partitions the rear end of the second game area 2551 and is formed in substantially the same plane as the flange portion 2502 of the center body frame 2520, and extends from the flange portion 2502 to the window portion 2501. And a plate-shaped rear end wall 2554 that extends in the longitudinal direction, and a game ball that is opened in the front-rear direction at a position on the rear end wall 2554 on the downstream side of the second special winning opening 2552 and that is received in the second special winning opening 2552 can pass. The discharge outlet 2555, the second count sensor 2556 that detects the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2552, and the transparent distribution that can guide the flow of the game ball in the second game area 2551. A guide member 2570 and a second attacker cover 2557 attached to the front surface of the distribution guide member 2570 and provided with a predetermined decoration are provided.

As shown, the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 has a base end side rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, a distal end side being a free end, and a width increasing toward the distal end side. Is formed in a blade shape (shape similar to the cross-sectional shape of a wing of an airplane etc.). The second opening/closing member 2553 can close (close) the second special winning opening 2552 when the base end side of the second opening/closing member 2553 is raised substantially vertically with the base end side facing downward. Then, the second special winning opening 2552 can be opened (opened state). Further, the second opening/closing member 2553 includes a pair of engagement protrusions 2553a protruding rearward from the rear surface of the base end side, and the drive from the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 is transmitted via these engagement protrusions 2553a. By doing so, it is possible to rotate.

Further, the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 of the second attacker unit 2550 is arranged on the rear side of the rear end wall 2554, and as shown in FIG. 131, the second attacker solenoid 2561 having a plunger that moves forward and backward in the left-right direction. And a rotation transmission piece 2562 for rotating the second opening/closing member 2553 by transmitting the forward/backward drive of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2561 to the engagement projection 2553a of the second opening/closing member 2553, and the rotation transmission piece 2562, And a bracket 2563 that supports the second attacker solenoid 2561 and is attached to the rear side of the center body frame 2520.

The second attacker solenoid 2561 of the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 is supported by a bracket 2563 so that the plunger moves forward and backward from the left side in a front view. Further, the rotation transmitting piece 2562 of the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 is rotatably supported by the bracket 2563 at the upper end position above the portion of the second attacker solenoid 2561 where the plunger moves forward and backward, and at the same time, the second attacker. The lower end side that extends below the solenoid 2561 is inserted between the pair of engagement protrusions 2553a in the second opening/closing member 2553, and the second attacker solenoid 2561 has a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). It is connected to the tip of the plunger.

As a result, in the second attacker drive mechanism 2560, when the second attacker unit 2561 advances and retracts the plunger, the rotation transmission piece 2562 rotates around the upper end, and the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 moves in an arc shape. .. Then, when the lower end of the rotation transmitting piece 2562 moves in an arc shape, the lower end of the rotation transmitting piece 2562 abuts against any one of the pair of engaging protrusions 2553a in the second opening/closing member 2553, and the abutting engaging protrusion 2553a is released. The second opening/closing member 2553 is rotated by being pushed in the moving direction of the lower end of the rotation transmitting piece 2562.

In this example, when the second opening/closing member 2553 is raised, that is, when the second special winning opening 2552 is closed, as shown in FIG. 131A, the rotation transmitting piece 2562. Is in a substantially vertical state, and the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2561 is in a forward position. When the second opening/closing member 2553 is laid down, that is, when the second special winning opening 2552 is opened, the rotation transmitting piece 2562 rotates counterclockwise in a front view as shown in FIG. 131(b). The second attacker solenoid 2561 is in the retracted position while being rotated by a predetermined angle (about 15 degrees) in the direction of.

The distribution guide member 2570 of the second attacker unit 2550 forms a plurality of flow paths through which the game balls can flow in the second game area 2551, and the game balls that have not been received in the second special winning opening 2552 are played in the game area. It can be released into 1100. As shown in FIG. 130, the distribution guide member 2570 is provided with an area entrance 2571 into which a game ball flowing down along the outer circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side in front view enters, and a game ball entering from the area entrance 2571. A deceleration flow path 2572 bent in a crank shape for decelerating the speed, and a game ball supplied from the deceleration flow path 2572 are received, and the game ball is formed so that the left end side becomes lower in front view and rolls the game ball to the left. A shelf-shaped branch guide shelf 2573, a first branch opening 2574 that opens downward from the left end of the branch guide shelf 2573 with a predetermined width that allows game balls to pass, and can communicate with the second big winning opening 2552, and a first branch opening On the left side of 2574, there is a second branch opening 2575 that opens toward a branch guide shelf 2573, through which game balls can pass, and does not communicate with the second special winning opening 2552.

Further, the distribution guide member 2570 is a shelf-like branch entrance shelf 2576 that is inclined from the vicinity of the lower end of the second branch entrance 2575 toward the right as viewed from the front, and the front of the second special winning opening 2552. The second opening/closing member 2553 is rotatable on the right side, and the game balls that have entered the first branch opening 2574 can be distributed, and the second big winning opening 2552 is arranged below the right end of the branch shelf 2576. The first flow passage 2577, the first discharge opening 2578 which is opened at the downstream end of the first flow passage 2577 and can discharge the game ball into the game area 1100, and the second big winning opening 2552 which is arranged in the first flow passage 2577. And a discharge port 2555 to communicate with each other, a large flow path 2579, a second flow path 2580 through which a game ball that has entered the second branch port 2575 flows, and a game ball that opens at the downstream end of the second flow path 2580 1100 and a second discharge port 2581 for discharging into 1100.

The first branch port 2574 of the distribution guide member 2570 has the right end as the left end of the branch guide shelf 2573 and the left end as the left end of the branch port shelf 2576, and the opening width (width in the left-right direction) of the game. It is set to be 2 to 3 times the outer diameter of the sphere. Further, the second branch port 2575 of the flow guide member 2570 has a size that the opening is slightly wider (for example, 0.5 mm to 1 mm) than the outer diameter of the game ball, and is the first branch port 2574. By comparison, it is difficult for game balls to enter. The lower end of the second branch port 2575 is located slightly above the upper surface of the branch port shelf 2576, and the second branch port 2575 is positioned so as to form a step with the branch port shelf 2576. Therefore, even if the game ball rolls toward the second branch port 2575 on the branch port shelf 2576, the game ball does not easily enter the second branch port 2575 by coming into contact with the step.

The branch shelf 2576 of the distribution guide member 2570 is formed shorter than the width of the first branch 3574, and the lower side of the right end in front view is the upper end of the second special winning opening 2552. In addition, in the first flow path 2577 of the distribution guide member 2570, the second opening/closing member 2553 is rotatably arranged at a position substantially directly below the right end of the branch shelf 2576, and the second opening/closing member 2553 rotates clockwise. The first outlet 2578 is closed by the second opening/closing member 2553 when it is rotated in the direction of and is laid down (the second special winning opening 2552 is open). That is, when the second special winning opening 2552 is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the first branch opening 2574 is guided to the second special winning opening 2552 by the second opening/closing member 2553 and is not discharged from the first discharging opening 2578. It is like this.

In this example, the distribution guide member 2570 and a part of the second attacker cover 2557 are transparently formed so that the inside of the second game area 2551 can be visually recognized from the outside (player side). ing. Further, in this example, the second count sensor 2556 is arranged on the upstream side of the discharge port 2555 in the large inlet flow passage 2579 in the flow guide member 2570.

The second attacker unit 2550 of the present example temporarily decelerates the game ball that has flowed down along the right outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 in the center accessory 2500 by the deceleration flow path 2572 and then rolls it to the left by the branch guide shelf 2573. It is designed to be guided. Then, in the second attacker unit 2550, a first branch opening 2574 that can communicate with the second special winning opening 2552 and a second branch opening 2575 that does not communicate with the second special winning opening 2552 open on the left side of the branch guide shelf 2573. Therefore, depending on which branch opening 2574, 2575 the gaming ball that is rollingly released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters, it is possible to excite and excite the player, and to entertain the player. It has become.

When the game ball discharged from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters the second branch port 2575, it is discharged into the game area 1100 from the second discharge port 2581 through the second flow path 2580. As described above, since the size of the second branch port 2575 is only slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, most of the game ball discharged from the branch guide shelf 2573 flows to the second branch port 2575. It does not enter, but enters the first branch port 2574.

On the other hand, when the game ball released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters the first branch port 2574, it is sent to the first flow path 2577. Then, when the second opening/closing member 2553 stands up and the second special winning opening 2552 is in the closed state, the game ball sent to the first flow path 2577 is not received in the second large winning opening 2552 and is at the lower end. It is discharged into the game area 1100 from the opened first discharge port 2578. On the other hand, when the second opening/closing member 2553 rotates clockwise in the front view and the second special winning opening 2552 is in the open state, the game ball sent to the first flow path 2577 is the second opening/closing. It is guided to the upper surface of the member 2553, received in the second special winning opening 2552, flows through the big winning passage 2579, is detected by the second count sensor 2556, and is then discharged from the discharging opening 2555 to the outside of the game areas 1100, 2551. It will be. Further, when the second opening/closing member 2553 is in the open position, the first outlet 2578 is closed by the second opening/closing member 2553, and thus the first outlet 2578 is sent to the first flow path 2577. The game ball is adapted to be received in the second special winning opening 2552. Depending on the timing at which the second opening/closing member 2553 performs the opening/closing operation, even if the game ball enters the first branch opening 2574, it is not accepted into the second special winning opening 2552, and the game area 1100 from the first outlet 2578. May be released inside.

Thus, according to the second attacker unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500, when the second opening/closing member 2553 pivots to the open position and the second special winning opening 2552 is in the open state, the peripheral wall of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball enters between the outer periphery on the right side of the portion 2503 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100, the game ball is accepted into the second big winning opening 2552 through the first branch opening 2574 and the first flow path 2577, which is easy. A game ball can be won into the second big winning opening 2552 by a simple driving operation, so that even a player who is not accustomed to the pachinko machine 1 can easily enjoy the game ball.

Further, according to the second attacker unit 2550, in the second game area 2551 in which the second special winning opening 2552 is arranged, the wall-shaped flow path by the distribution guide member 2570 is used to guide the game ball, which causes an obstacle. Since the game ball is not guided by the nail, the guide direction of the game ball changes due to the obstacle nail tilting due to the contact of the game ball or the like, and the probability of acceptance into the second special winning opening 2552 changes. Can be reliably avoided, and the initial state can be maintained for a long period of time, so that the player can be fully entertained.

[2-5B. Front right movable production unit]
Next, the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. The front right movable effect unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged below the second attacker unit 2550 so as to be symmetrical to the front left movable effect unit 2300 with the left and right center of the game area 1100 sandwiched therebetween. The front left movable effect unit 2300 has a substantially symmetrical shape. The front right movable effect unit 2600 is a shallow box-shaped unit in which one side of the front view is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, the outer shape of the front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape, and the front side is opened. On the right side of the main body 2601, the lower right first decorative body 2602 arranged in the unit main body 2601, rotatably supported at the upper end side and formed in a shape imitating a lantern, and the right lower first decorative body 2602 in front view. A lower right second decorative body 2603 which is arranged in the unit main body 2601 and is rotatably supported at the upper end side thereof and is smaller than the lower right first decorative body 2602 in a shape imitating a lantern, and a lower right second decorative body A body 2603 and a lower right first decorative body 2602 are movably supported within a predetermined range, and a moving support mechanism 2620 is provided on the rear side of the unit main body 2601 and a lower right first decorative body 2602 via the moving support mechanism 2620. Also, the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 for moving and driving the lower right second decoration 2603 and the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 are attached to the rear side and the rear side of the unit main body 2601, and cooperate with the unit main body 2601. And a unit base 2604 that supports the movement support mechanism 2620.

Further, the front right movable effect unit 2600 includes a left base plate 2606 attached to the front side of the unit base 2604 so as to extend leftward from the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the unit main body 2601 in front view, and the front surface inside the unit main body 2601. A plate-shaped decorative member 2607 attached to the right corner, a front upper decorative member 2608 attached to the front end of the upper side of the unit main body 2601 and having a predetermined decoration, and a front upper decorative member 2608 attached to the lower corner of the unit main body 2601 and having a predetermined decoration And a lower decoration member 2609.

Further, the front right movable effect unit 2600 includes a right side decoration board 2610 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 2604 on the rear side of the unit main body 2601 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a right side on the rear side of the unit main body 2601. A right decorative body decorative substrate 2611 which is arranged on the front side of the decorative substrate 2610, is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2604, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof. Note that reference numeral 2612 in the drawing is a head cover that protects the tip of the plunger that moves forward and backward in the lower right side drive solenoid 2630. Further, the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is attached to the unit base 2604 so that the plunger moves forward and backward from the left side in front view.

The unit main body 2601 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 is formed so that the upper surface formed in a box shape becomes lower toward the left in a front view, and within the second game area 2551 in the second attacker unit 2550. Is a shelf portion 2601a capable of guiding the game ball discharged from the first discharge port 2578 or the second discharge port 2581 to the center side in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. In addition, the unit main body 2601 has three-dimensional unevenness formed on a box-shaped bottom surface (a surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200), and at least the bottom surface has a light-transmitting property. There is. Further, the unit main body 2601 has an opening 2601b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper portions of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603. The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 arranged on the front side through the opening 2601b of the unit main body 2601 and the moving support mechanism 2620 are connected to each other.

As shown in the figure, the movement support mechanism 2620 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 has a lower end side rotatably supported by a unit main body 2601 and a unit base 2604 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper end side of a lower right first part. A rod-like shape that rotatably supports one ornament 2602, and a drive crank 2621 connected to the tip of the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 at approximately the center in the longitudinal direction, and a position on the right side of the drive crank 2621 in front view. The lower end side is rotatably supported by the unit main body 2601 and the unit base 2604 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper end side rotatably supports the lower right second decorative body 2603. 2622 and a connecting member 2623 that rotatably connects the upper end side of the operating link member 2622 and the upper end side of the driving crank 2621 so that the operating link member 2622 extends substantially parallel to the driving crank 2621, Equipped with.

The drive crank 2621 of the movement support mechanism 2620 is configured to support and connect the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the connecting member 2623 at the upper end side by one shaft member, respectively. Further, similarly to the drive crank 2621, the operation link member 2622 has the lower right second decorative body 2603 and the connecting member 2623 supported and connected by one shaft member at the upper end side, respectively. Further, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are formed such that the rotation axis and the axis supporting the decorations 2602 and 2603 have the same distance. When the drive crank 2621 is rotated by the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, the movement support mechanism 2620 is rotated so that the operation link member 2622 is always parallel to the drive crank 2621 via the connecting member 2623. ing.

In addition, as shown in the figure, in this example, the connecting member 2623 is formed in a curved shape in an arc shape. Although not shown, the front right movable effect unit 2600 is provided with a stopper that restricts the rotation range of the drive crank 2621.

The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 are respectively formed in a shape imitating a lantern as shown in the drawing, and are also formed in a plate shape. The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are formed to have a light-transmitting property. Although not shown in detail, in the state in which the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are assembled as the front right movable effect unit 2600, the lower right first decorative body 2602 is the lower right first decorative body 2602. It is positioned in front of the second decorative body 2603, and when the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are shaken by the drive of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, they do not come into contact with each other. It has become.

The right base plate 2306 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 is formed to be translucent. The right side decoration board 2610 of the table right movable effect unit 2600 causes the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body in front view of the table right movable effect unit 2600. Areas outside 2603 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, the right decoration body decoration substrate 2611 is configured such that the LED mounted on the front surface is made to emit light so that the lower right first decoration body 2602 and the lower right second decoration body 2603 can be made to emit light.

In the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of this example, the upper part of the unit base 2604 is attached to the rear side of the center body frame 2520.

Next, the movement of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 in the front right movable effect unit 2600 will be described. In the front right movable effect unit 2600 of this example, as shown in FIG. 134(a), in a normal state (when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is not energized), the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are The upper end side is inclined to the left by about 45 degrees from the vertical state, and the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is advanced from the main body.

Further, in a normal state, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are brought to the front by the load of the lower right first decoration 2602 and the lower right second decoration 2603 supported on the upper ends of the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622. Although a force to rotate in the counterclockwise direction is visually applied, a stopper (not shown) regulates the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 so as not to rotate further in the counterclockwise direction. There is.

From this normal state, when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is energized, the plunger moves to the right when viewed from the front, and the drive crank 2621 connected to the tip of the plunger at the center in the longitudinal direction is viewed from the front with the lower end side as the center. Will rotate in the clockwise direction. When the drive crank 2621 rotates, the operation link member 2622 connected by the connecting member 2623 also rotates in the same direction at the same time as the drive crank 2621. In this example, as shown in FIG. 134(b), even when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is driven (energized) to retract the plunger, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are in a vertical state. On the other hand, the upper end side is inclined to the left when viewed from the front.

Then, when the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 rotate clockwise in a predetermined range by the driving of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, the lower right first decoration body 2602 and the lower right first support body 2602 supported at their upper ends are rotated. The second ornament 2603 also rotates. Since the upper ends of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are rotatably supported (axially supported), the driving crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are rotated and moved. Then, when an inertial force acts on the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603, and the rotational movement stops, the inertial force causes the center of the upper end pivotally supported by the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622. As a result, it will sway with flutter.

On the other hand, when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is deenergized when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is energized (the state of FIG. 134(b)), the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 becomes free. .. At this time, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 that support the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are tilted to the left in a front view from a state in which the upper end side is vertical, as illustrated. Since it is in a state, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the loads applied from the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603, respectively. The force to rotate in the clockwise direction acts, and the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 rotate in the counterclockwise direction and automatically return to the position in the normal state. Will be done.

When the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 return to the normal state, inertial forces act on the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603, respectively. When the rotational movement is stopped, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 sway.

Therefore, the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of this example repeats energization and de-energization of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 as appropriate, so that the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decoration. The body 2603 can be swung, and the movement of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 can be enjoyed, and the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body can be performed. By swinging the body 2603, the player can be made to suggest the arrival of a chance or the like.

[2-6. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 139. 135 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, FIG. 136 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main constituent member as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main constituent member as seen from the rear. is there.

The back unit 300 of this example is a back box 3001 that is attached to the back side of the game panel 1150 and has a front side that is open, and a back wall 3001b in which an opening 3001c facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed. A rear upper left decoration unit 3050 which is arranged near the front surface in the box 3001 above the opening 3001c in the left corner when viewed from the front and is capable of light emission decoration depending on the game state, and below the opening 3001c near the front surface in the back box 3001. A ball that is arranged on the side and guides the game ball received in the first starting port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 and the second large winning port 2552 of the center accessory 2500 to a predetermined lower position. A guiding unit 3060, a back inside movable effect unit 3100 attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001 and closing a part of the opening 3001c according to the game state, and a back inside movable effect unit 3100 inside the back box 3000. A rear-up rear movable effect unit 3200 which is arranged on the upper side and the front side and moves according to the game state, and a front-side movable effect unit 3400 which is arranged on the front side of the back-rear movable effect unit 3200 and movable according to the game state. , A rear lower back movable effect unit 3500 which is arranged between the ball guiding unit 3060 and the back center movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3000 and movable according to the game state, and a game state attached to the front side of the ball guide unit 3060. A lower back front movable effect unit 3600 that moves according to, a rear left movable effect unit 3700 that is arranged on the left side of the opening 3001c of the back box 3000 in front of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 and that moves according to the game state, Equipped with.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a horizontally long back lower board base 3010 attached near the lower end of the rear surface of the back wall 3001b of the back box 3001, a panel relay board 3011 attached to the rear side of the back lower board base 3010, and a back box. A plate-shaped laterally long back middle substrate base 3012 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3001b along the lower side of the opening 3001c, a lamp driving substrate 3013 attached to the rear surface of the back middle substrate base 3012, and a back box. In the rear wall 3001b of the rear wall 3001b, a rear right substrate base 3014 having a vertically long rectangular shape is attached to the left side in a rear view of the opening 3001c, a motor drive substrate 3015 attached to the rear side of the back right substrate base 3014, and a back box 3001. The rear wall 3001b is provided with a horizontally elongated plate-shaped back upper substrate base 3016 attached to the upper side of the opening 3001c on the rear surface, and a back upper back relay substrate 3017 attached to the rear side of the back upper substrate base 3016.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a shallow box-shaped back upper left board base 3018 which is attached to the upper left corner of the back box 3001 when viewed from the front and is open to the right, and the back left which is attached to the right side surface of the back upper left board base 3018. A relay board 3019 and a wiring support member 3020 extending in the up-down direction and attached near the front end of the right side surface inside the back box 3001 are provided.

Although not shown, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 at the right side of the opening 3001c in the rear view and in the substantially vertical center thereof. A lock member for holding the lock member is provided.

The back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 is not described in detail, but the back left upper decoration unit 3050, the ball guiding unit 3060, the back inside movable effect unit 3100, the back up rear movable effect unit 3200, and the back top are appropriately positioned. The front movable effect unit 3400, the back lower movable effect unit 3500, the back lower movable effect unit 3600, the back left movable effect unit 3700, each substrate base 3010, 3012, 3014, 3016, 3018, and the wiring support member 3020. Equipped with mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting.

Further, the back box 3001 includes a flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a extending outward from the front end, and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portion 3001a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the back box 3001 includes a fixed frame piece 3001d extending rearward in a frame shape at a position outside the peripheral edge of the opening 3001c by a predetermined width on the rear surface side of the rear wall 3001b, and a fixed frame piece. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided in a predetermined position of the liquid crystal display device 3001d and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted thereinto, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the fixed frame piece 3001d from the rear side.

[2-7. Back upper left decoration unit]
Next, the back upper left decoration unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the rear upper left decoration unit 3050 of the rear unit 3000 is arranged near the front left upper end in the front view of the rear box 3001, and the upper end is attached to the upper front edge of the rear box 3001. The lower end is attached to the upper part of the back left movable effect unit 3700 described later. This rear upper left decoration unit 3050 is a shallow box-shaped translucent rear upper left decoration member 3051 which is decorated on the front surface and has a rear opening, and a base member 3052 which closes the rear end of the rear upper left decoration member 3051. And a rear upper left decorative substrate (not shown) mounted on the front side of the base member 3052 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The back upper left decoration unit 3050 is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 formed in a substantially circular shape, and by illuminating the LED of the back upper left decoration substrate provided inside, the back The upper left decorative member 3051 can be light-emitted and decorated in a plane shape in an appropriate color. By illuminating the back upper left decorative member 3051 in a planar shape, the relevant portion of the decorative sticker 1102 attached to the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 can be brightly illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the inside of the game area 1100 can be made brighter to make the pachinko machine 1 more prominent.

[2-8. Sphere guidance unit]
Next, the ball guiding unit 3060 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. The ball guiding unit 3060 of this example is arranged at a position lower than the front end and the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and in the state of being assembled to the game board 4, the rear side of the center accessory 2500. It is positioned below the stage 2510. In addition, the ball guiding unit 3060 is a game ball received in the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, and the second big winning opening of the second attacker unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500. The game ball received in 2552 can be received and guided downward and discharged.

The ball guiding unit 3060 includes a unit base 3061 attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and extending in the left-right direction, and an under-stage decoration substrate 3062 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 3061 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A transparent substrate cover 3063 for covering the front surface of the stage lower decoration substrate 3062, a stage lower left decoration member 3064 and a stage lower right decoration member 3065 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3061 along the lower edge of the substrate cover 3063, Equipped with.

As shown in the figure, the ball guiding unit 3060 is formed such that the upper end of the unit base 3061 is formed in a loose V shape such that the center in the left-right direction is lowered, and the under-stage decorative substrate 3062 and the substrate cover 3063 are also units. It is formed in a loose V shape along the upper end of the base 3061. The unit base 3061 of the ball guiding unit 3060 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction, is received by the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and is a passage hole through which the game ball guided backward by the gutter 2110b can pass. 3061a, a general discharge passage 3061b that receives the game ball that is received in the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and is guided rearward by the gutter 2110b, and guides it downward. And a second discharge passage 3061c for guiding the game ball guided to the rear of the center accessory 2500 from the discharge port 2555 and guiding it downward.

The general discharge passages 3061b of the unit base 3061 are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the four general winning openings 2104 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game balls received in the two adjacent general winning openings 2104 are separately provided. It is formed so that after it is received, it merges and is discharged downward from one location. In addition, the general discharge passage 3061b has a form in which the front side is opened, and the front end side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100 and the rear surface of the panel plate 1210 so that the game balls do not fall forward. ..

In addition, the second discharge passage 3061c of the unit base 3061, after receiving the game ball from the second special winning opening 2552 in the upper part of the unit base 3061, guide to the vicinity of the lower part of the unit base 3061 in front of the unit base 3061 The unit base 3061 is formed so as to be guided to the rear side of the unit base 3061 through an opening penetrating the unit base 3061 and further to the rear side of the unit base 3061 to a position closer to the center in the left-right direction to discharge downward. The front side of the second discharge passage 3061c is open on the front side of the unit base 3061, and the front end side is closed by a plate-shaped second discharge passage cover 3066.

Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 is further provided with a first discharge passage member 3067 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3061 and guiding and discharging the game sphere that has passed through the passage hole 3061a of the unit base 3061. Although not shown, the first discharge passage member 3067 has an open front and a front end closed by a rear surface of the unit base 3061. The first discharge passage member 3067 is formed so as to guide the game ball, which has passed through the passage hole 3061a from the front side, to the lower left direction in rear view and discharge downward from the position adjacent to the second discharge passage 3061c. ..

Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 includes a lower back left relay board 3068 attached to the left end front surface of the unit base 3061 and a lower back right relay board 3069 attached to the right end front surface of the unit base 3061.

Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 is attached to a predetermined position of the first discharge passage member 3067 and detects a game ball received in the first start opening 2101 and a general discharge passage 3061c in the unit base 3061. The general prize opening sensor 3071 which is attached to a predetermined position of the general prize opening 2104 for detecting the game balls received in the general prize opening 2104, and the unit base 3061 which is attached to a position adjacent to the central passage hole 3061a in the left-right direction for detecting magnetism. And a magnetic detection sensor 3072.

In the present example, four general winning opening sensors 3071 in the ball guiding unit 3060 are provided, and the general winning opening 2104 arranged near the big winning opening 2103 on both left and right sides of the attacker unit 2100 is generally different from the general winning opening 2104. The general winning opening sensor 3071 detects only the general winning opening sensor 3071 in the discharging passage 3061a, and the general winning opening 2104 arranged at a position far from the special winning opening 2103 has two positions in the general discharging passage 3061a. It is adapted to be detected by the general winning opening sensor 3071. As a result, it is possible to know in which general winning opening 2104 the game ball has been accepted.

Further, the magnetic detection sensor 3072 of the ball guiding unit 3060 can detect magnetism acting in the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect fraudulent activity using a magnet or the like.

The game balls guided downward by the general discharge passage 3061b, the second discharge passage 3061c, and the first discharge passage member 3067 of the ball guiding unit 3060 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and the substrate holder 1160. The out-ball discharging portion 1161 is discharged below the game board 4. Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 can lighten and decorate the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 by causing the LED mounted on the under-stage decoration substrate 3062 to emit light.

[2-9. Back inside movable production unit]
Next, the back inside movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 153. 142 is a front view of the back inside movable effect unit in the back unit, FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the inside back movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the inside back movable effect unit seen from the rear. Is. Also, FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back center movable effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is a rear center movable effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. Also, FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the back center drive mechanism in the back center movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back center drive mechanism in the back center movable effect unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back center drive mechanism disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is a disassembled view of the back center drive mechanism disassembled for each main member and seen after. FIG. In addition, FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back center movable effect unit.

The back inside movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b so as to close the opening 3001c from the front side in the back box 3001. This back-inside movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001 and has an opening window 3101a that is substantially the same size as the opening 3001c and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A back middle unit base 3101, a vertically long rectangular left door member 3120L and a right door member 3120R that are arranged on the front side of the back middle unit base 3101 and have a vertical direction higher than the height of the opening window 3101a, and a left door member 3120L. And, the right door member 3120R is driven to move in the left-right direction between a position outside the opening window 3101a and a position on the front side of the opening window 3101a depending on the game state, and below the opening window 3101a in the back center unit base 3101. And a back center drive mechanism 3150 attached to the side front surface.

In addition, the back inside movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the upper end front surface of the back inside unit base 3101 and restricts the upper ends of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R from moving forward, so that the back inside unit base 3101 has a substantially entire width. A plate-shaped back middle upper decorative member 3102 extending in the left-right direction, and a back middle unit base mounted on the front side of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R along the lower end of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101. A plate-shaped back center lower decoration member 3103 extending in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width of 3101, and a back center upper decoration member 3102 and a back center upper decoration member 3102 disposed on the right side of the opening window 3101a in the back center unit base 3101. A plate-shaped back middle right front decoration member 3104 attached to the front surface of the lower decoration member 3103 and a left rear front surface of the rear middle unit base 3101 behind the left door member 3120L are attached to the left front surface of the rear middle unit base 3101 and the opening window 3101a. A plate-shaped back middle left decoration member 3105 having the same height, and a plate-like member attached to the front right side of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101 behind the right door member 3120R and having substantially the same height as the opening window 3101a. And a right decoration member 3106 in the back.

Further, the back center movable effect unit 3100 has a position detection sensor which is attached to the rear side of the back center unit base 3101 and below the opening window 3101a and which can detect the moving positions of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R. The back middle relay board 3108 and a board cover 3109 that covers the rear surface of the back middle relay board 3108 and is attached to the rear side of the back middle unit base 3101 are provided. The back-inside relay board 3108 is for relaying the connection between the position detection sensor 3108a, the door decoration board 3125, the left door drive motor 3161, and the right door drive motor 3181 and the lamp drive board 3013 and the motor drive board 3015. Is. As shown in FIG. 145, the back middle relay board 3108 is provided with a position detection sensor 3108a. The position detection sensor 3108a causes the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R respectively to the left of the opening window 3101a. And the retracted position located on the right side, and the center appearance position where the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are in contact with each other at substantially the center in the left-right direction, are arranged so that it can be detected.

In addition, reference numeral 3110 in the drawing is a wiring retainer for fixing wiring that connects the door decoration substrate 3125 of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R (not shown) and the back middle relay substrate 3108.

The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R of the back-and-center movable effect unit 3100 are formed in a shape imitating a sliding door, and the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to each other. ing. The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R have a frame body 3121 in which both left and right sides extend vertically with respect to a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape imitating soft sliding fusuma, and a rear side of the frame body 3121. A transparent plate-shaped door main body 3122 to be arranged, a movable base 3123 attached to the lower end of the door main body 3122 and guided and driven in the left and right direction by the inside back drive mechanism 3150, and an inside back unit base attached to the upper end of the door body 3122. An upper guide member 3124 slidably guided between the rear wall of 3101 and the back middle upper decorative member 3102, and a through hole corresponding to the central opening of the frame body 3121 arranged on the rear side of the door body 3122. A door decoration board 3125 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side thereof is formed in substantially the same shape as the door decoration board 3125, and is arranged between the door decoration board 3125 and the door body 3122. And a light guide member (not shown) that guides light from the LED to the frame.

In the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R, a plate-shaped door body 3122 is transparently formed, and a member (decoration) arranged on the rear side through a vertically elongated rectangular opening formed in the center of the frame body 3121. The members and the liquid crystal display device 1900) can be visually recognized. In addition, the frame 3121 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the door decoration substrate 3125 to emit light.

Further, the movable bases 3123 of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R penetrate in the left-right direction, the guide hole 3123a into which the rail shaft 3151 of the back center drive mechanism 3150 is inserted, and the drive belt 3165 of the back center drive mechanism 3150. It includes a belt fixing portion 3123b fixed to 3185, and a detection piece 3123c that extends rearward and can be detected by a position detection sensor provided on the back intermediate relay board 3108.

The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided by the rail shaft 3152 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction by inserting the rail shaft 3151 of the back center drive mechanism 3150 into the guide hole 3123a of the movable base 3123. It has become. Further, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided by the one rail shaft 3151 in the front-rear direction at the same position in the left-right direction, and the mutually facing sides are brought into contact with each other. This makes it possible to form one large surface. Further, as described above, since the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided in the left-right direction by the single rail shaft 3151, they cannot overlap with each other in the front-rear direction or be overtaken. There is.

As shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, the back inside drive mechanism 3150 of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 is a long rail shaft that guides the lower ends of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R slidably in the left and right directions. 3151 and a main body base 3152 that supports both ends of the rail shaft 3151 and is formed by bending a metal plate. The rail shaft 3151 in the back inside drive mechanism 3150 is formed in a columnar shape. Further, the main body base 3152 of the back-and-center drive mechanism 3150 has a main body 3152a that has a substantially U-shaped cross section with an open front and extends in the left-right direction, and an end portion of the rail shaft 3151 that extends upward from both upper ends of the main body 3152a. The rail support piece 3152b for supporting and the fixed piece 3152c extending forward from both lower ends of the main body 3152a are provided. Further, the main body base 3152 is formed with mounting holes and openings at appropriate positions.

Further, the back-center drive mechanism 3150 includes a plate-shaped left base 3160 fixed to the upper side of the left fixed piece 3152c of the main body base 3152 and a left base 3160 penetrating from the lower side so that the rotation shaft moves upward. A left door drive motor 3161 mounted below the left side fixing piece 3152c of the extension body base 3152, a left drive gear 3162 fixed to the rotation shaft of the left drive motor 3161, and a driven gear 3163a meshing with the left drive gear 3162. , And a drive pulley 3163b that integrally rotates below the driven gear 3163a, and is rotatably supported by the left base 3160 and the main body base 3152, and the same as the drive pulley 3163b in the left drive rotor 3163. A left driven pulley 3164 arranged on the left side of the right fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152 and a left drive belt 3165 wound around the left driven pulley 3164 and the drive pulley 3163b of the left drive rotating body 3163; A pulley support member 3166 that rotatably supports the left driven pulley 3164 and is slidably attached to the main body base 3152 in the left-right direction, and a spring fixed that is fixed to the main body base 3152 at a position on the left side of the pulley support member 3166. A member 3167, a tension spring 3168 arranged between the spring fixing member 3167 and the pulley supporting member 3166, and biasing the spring fixing member 3167 and the pulley supporting member 3166 in directions away from each other, and above the left base 3160. And a gear cover 3169 which is attached and covers the upper side of the left drive gear 3162.

Further, the back-center drive mechanism 3150 includes a plate-shaped right base 3180 fixed to the upper side of the right side fixing piece 3152c in the main body base 3152, and a rotation shaft extending through the right base 3180 from the lower side to the upper side. A right door drive motor 3181 attached to the lower side of the right side fixing piece 3152c of the extension main body base 3152, a right drive gear 3182 fixed to the rotation shaft of the right drive motor 3181, and a driven gear 3183a meshing with the right drive gear 3182a. , And a drive pulley 3183b that integrally rotates above the driven gear 3183a and is rotatably supported by the right base 3180 and the main body base 3152, and the same height as the drive pulley 3183b in the right drive rotor 3183. Now, the right driven pulley 3184 disposed on the right side of the left fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152, the right driven belt 3185 wound around the right driven pulley 3184 and the drive pulley 3183b of the right driving rotating body 3183, and the right A pulley supporting member 3186 that rotatably supports the driven pulley 3184 and is slidably attached to the main body base 3152 in the left-right direction, and a spring fixing member that is fixed to the main body base 3152 at a position on the right side of the pulley supporting member 3186. 3187, a tension spring 3188 which is arranged between the spring fixing member 3187 and the pulley supporting member 3186, and urges the spring fixing member 3187 and the pulley supporting member 3186 in directions away from each other, and is attached to the upper side of the right base 3180. And a gear cover 3189 that covers the upper side of the right drive gear 3182.

In the back-inside drive mechanism 3150, as shown in the figure, the right drive belt 3185 is arranged above the left drive belt 3165. Further, in the back center drive mechanism 3150, the belt fixing portion 3123b of the movable base 3123 of the left door member 3120L is fixed to a portion located on the front side of the left drive belt 3165 that is rotated by the drive pulley 3163b and the left driven pulley 3164. The belt fixing portion 3123b of the movable base 3123 of the right door member 3120R is adapted to be fixed to a portion located on the front side of the right driving belt 3185 which is rotated by the driving pulley 3183b and the right driven pulley 3184 (see FIG. 143 and the like). ).

In addition, the back center drive mechanism 3150 further includes a protection member 3153 attached to a predetermined position of the main body 3152a in the main body base 3152 and for preventing the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 from coming into contact with the main body base 3152. ing. The protective member 3153 is attached so that a portion extending in the up-down direction and having a semi-cylindrical shape and projecting forward protrudes forward from the surface of the body 3152a of the body base 3152 extending in the up-down direction. When the belt 3165 or the right drive belt 3185 is bent, the line contact is made before the main body base 3152, and the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 are not in surface contact with the main body base 3152. It is possible to prevent the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 from being worn early.

The back center drive mechanism 3150 rotates the left drive belt 3165 by the left door drive motor 3161 to move the left door member 3120L to the left side of the left end of the opening window 3101a in the back center unit base 3101 in front view. The left retracted position and the right end of the left door member 3120L can be moved in the left-right direction between the right end of the opening window 3101a and the maximum appearance position located slightly leftward. In addition, the back center drive mechanism 3150 drives the right drive belt 3185 to rotate by the right door drive motor 3181, so that the right door member 3120R is entirely moved to the right of the front end right side of the opening window 3101a in the back center unit base 3101. Can be moved in the left-right direction between the retracted position in which is located and the maximum appearance position in which the left end of the right door member 3120R is located slightly to the right of the left end of the opening window 3101a.

Next, the movement of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 of this example will be described. The back inside movable effect unit 3100 can move the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the left-right direction by rotationally driving the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181 according to the game state. It is like this. In the normal state, the back inside movable effect unit 3100 has a state in which the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are in the retracted position where the opening window 3101a in the back inside unit base 3101 is located on the left and right sides in a front view. Is becoming. In this retracted position, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are positioned outside the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display means 1900 is not blocked. (See FIG. 108 etc.). Further, in the retracted position, the left door member 3120L is located directly behind the back left movable effect unit 3700, which will be described later, and the right door member 3120R is located directly behind the back center right front decorative member 3104. The door member 3120R is almost invisible to the player.

When the left door driving motor 3161 and the right door driving motor 3181 are rotationally driven in an appropriate direction with the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the retracted position, respectively, the left driving belt 3165 and the right driving belt 3185 rotate ( The left door member 3120L moves rightward, and the right door member 3120R moves leftward. When the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R move in the right direction and the left direction, respectively, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is gradually blocked from the left and right by the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R, and the display area is gradually narrowed. It is possible to perform such a movable effect. When the right end of the left door member 3120L and the left end of the right door member 3120R contact each other at substantially the center in the left-right direction and the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R move to the center appearance position, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. The screen can be in a closed state (see FIG. 151(a)).

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 151B and 151C, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R can be independently moved in the left and right directions by the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181. Therefore, it is possible to move (appear) only the left door member 3120L or the right door member 3120R to the front side of the liquid crystal display means 1900.

By the way, since the rear side of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 can be visually recognized through the vertically long rectangular opening of the frame 3121, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R. When the screen is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, an image corresponding to the opening of the frame body 3121 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so that the player feels as if the left door member 3120L or the right door member 3120L. This makes it possible to give an illusion that an image is displayed on the door member 3120R. Therefore, the decoration (the pattern of the sliding doors) of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R can be variously changed, and the pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired of can be provided. In addition, a moving image may be displayed as an image, which gives the player the illusion that the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R themselves are display means such as a liquid crystal display device. As a result, it is possible to perform a collaboration effect of an image effect and a movable effect, and it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player.

[2-10. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back-and-back movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 152 to 168. FIG. 152 is a front view of the back-up rear movable effect unit in the back unit, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the back-up rear movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 154 is a view of the back-up rear movable effect unit seen from the rear. FIG. Also, FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the back-and-back movable effect unit disassembled into an arm slide unit and an arm unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 156 is a back-and-back movable effect unit as an arm slide unit and an arm unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen after. Also, FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the arm slide unit of the back-and-back rear movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. Further, FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the arm unit of the back-and-back movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the arm unit of the back-rear movable effect unit viewed from the rear.

Also, FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the back-up/back-movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the back-rear moveable effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the upper arm unit of the arm unit as seen from the front, FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the upper arm unit of the arm unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the forearm unit of the unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the forearm unit of the arm unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing movement by the arm slide unit in the back upper movable effect unit, and FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing movement by the arm unit in the back upper movable effect unit.

The back-up rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is arranged above the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and above the back middle movable effect unit 3100. This back-up rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001b above the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and extends in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width of the back box 3001. An arm unit 3250, which is arranged on the front side of the slide unit 3210 and is slidable in the left-right direction by the arm slide unit 3210, and which imitates a predetermined character's arm (a part below the shoulder) is provided.

[2-10A. Arm slide unit]
As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the arm slide unit 3210 in the back-and-back movable effect unit 3100 is a shallow box-like horizontally long rectangular shape which is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001c of the back box 3001 and whose front side is open. The slide base 3211, a slide rail 3212 attached to a lower part of the front surface of the slide base 3211 and extending in the left-right direction, and a rack gear 3213a guided in the left-right direction by the slide rail 3212 and extending in the left-right direction at the upper end have an arm unit 3250 on the front surface. At a position on the left side in front view of the pinion gear 3214 that meshes with the pinion gear 3214 that meshes with the rack gear 3213a of the slider 3213 and that is rotatably supported by the slide base 3211. A first transmission gear 3215 that is rotatably supported; and a second transmission gear 3216 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3215 and that is rotatably supported on the slide base 3211 at a position on the left side of the first transmission gear 3214 in front view. A small diameter small gear 3217a that meshes with the second transmission gear 3216, and a large diameter gear 3217b that integrally rotates on the rear side of the small diameter gear 3217a and has a diameter larger than the small diameter gear 3217a are provided, and the second transmission gear 3216 is provided on the slide base 3211. Of the transmission gear 3217 that is rotatably supported at a position on the left side of the transmission gear 3217, a drive gear 3218 that meshes with a large-diameter gear 3217b of the transmission gear 3217 and that is disposed at a position on the left side of the transmission gear 3217 when viewed from the front, An arm slide drive motor 3219 having a drive gear 3218 fixed to the rotation shaft is disposed on the front side of the arm slide drive motor 3219.

The arm slide unit 3210 covers the front side from the pinion gear 3214 to the drive gear 3218, is attached to the upper left front surface of the slide base 3211, and has a horizontally long plate-shaped gear cover 3220 to which the arm slide drive motor is attached on the front side. , A horizontally long slide guide 3221 that is arranged below the slide rail 3212 and is attached to the slide base 3211 and slidably supports the rear surface of the arm unit 3250, and is arranged on the front surface of the slide base 3211 near both left and right ends, respectively. The slide position detection sensor 3222 that detects the position of the slider 3213, the sensor cover 3223 that covers the front surface side of the slide position detection sensor 3222 and is attached to the slide base 3211, and the slide base at a position on the right side in front of the pinion gear 3214. An arm slide drive motor 3219, a slide position detection sensor 3222, and an arm unit relay board 3259 attached to the front surface of 3211, and a back and rear relay board 3224 for relaying connection between the lamp drive board 3013 and the motor drive board 3015. , And a wire retainer 3225 for holding a wire connecting the rear upper rear relay board 3224 and the arm unit relay board 3259.

As the slide rail 3212 of the arm slide unit 3210, an Acculide (registered trademark) slide rail is used. Further, detection pieces 3213b extending upward are provided at both ends in the left-right direction of the slider. When the detection pieces 3213b are detected by the slide position detection sensor 3222, the detection pieces 3213b in the left-right direction of the slider 3213 (arm unit 3250) are provided. The slide position can be detected. In addition, the gear cover 3220 of the arm slide unit 3210 cooperates with the slide base 3211 to rotate the pinion gear 3214, the first transmission gear 3215, the second transmission gear 3216, and the transmission gear 3217 around the shafts extending in the front-rear direction. It can be rotatably supported.

In this arm slide unit 3210, when the arm slide drive motor 3219 rotationally drives the pinion gear 3214, the rack gear 3213a meshed with the pinion gear 3214 can move (slide) the slider 3213 in the left-right direction. The arm unit 3250 attached to the front surface can be moved in the left-right direction.

[2-10B. Arm unit]
As shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the arm unit 3250 in the back-and-back movable effect unit 3200 has an arm unit base 3251 attached to the front surface of the slider 3213 in the arm slide unit 3210 and a predetermined position in the arm unit base 3251. A first rotating shaft 3252 having a rear end supported and extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper arm unit 3300 having a base end rotatably supported by the first rotating shaft 3252 and formed in a shape simulating an upper arm of a predetermined character. And an arm unit cover 3253 that covers the front surface of the upper arm unit 3300 on the base end side and is attached to the front side of the arm unit base 3251 and supports the front end side of the first rotating shaft 3252, and is attached to the front surface of the arm unit cover 3253. And an upper arm drive motor 3254 for rotating the upper arm unit 3300 around the first rotation shaft 3252, and a predetermined character which is arranged on the front side of the upper arm unit 3300 and is rotatably supported on the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300. And a forearm unit 3350 formed in a shape imitating the forearm.

In addition, the arm unit 3250 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the upper arm drive motor 3254 and is disposed between the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253. The drive gear 3255 meshes with the drive gear 3255 and is larger than the drive gear 3255. A large diameter gear 3256a having a small diameter, and a small diameter gear 3256b that is arranged integrally rotatably in front of the large diameter gear 3256a and that has a smaller diameter than the large diameter gear 3256a and that meshes with the upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300. And a transmission gear 3256 rotatably supported by the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253.

Further, the arm unit 3250 is attached to the front surface of the arm unit base 3251 and has a circular arc-shaped sliding protrusion centered on the first rotation shaft 3252 which can be brought into contact with the rear surface of the arm unit base 3251 of the upper arm unit 3300. An upper arm rotation guide 3257 having 3257a, an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258 attached to a predetermined position of the arm unit cover 3253 for detecting a rotation end of the upper arm unit 3300 in both directions, and a first rotation shaft 3252. At a position on the left side in a front view with respect to the position where is arranged, the arm unit relay board 3259 attached to the front surface of the arm unit base 3251 and the front surface of the arm unit relay board 3259 are covered and are located rearward of the upper arm unit 3300. And a plate-shaped substrate cover 3260 that is arranged and attached to the arm unit base 3251.

Further, the arm unit 3250 is attached to the upper front surfaces of the arm unit cover 3253 and the substrate cover 3260 above the upper arm unit 3300, respectively, and an upper guide bracket 3261 extending forward and a tip portion of the upper guide bracket 3261 are provided. And a guide roller 3262 that is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the up-and-down direction and is capable of contacting with the rear surface of the unit base 3401 in the back-and-front movable production unit 3400 to be described later.

Further, the arm unit 3250 includes a rear upper rear relay board 3224, an upper arm drive motor 3254, an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258, an upper arm decoration board 3305, a forearm drive motor 3307, a forearm rotation position detection sensor 3316, and a forearm decoration 3352. An arm unit relay board 3259 that relays the connection with the arm unit relay board 3259, and a wiring cover 3263 for fixing the wiring that connects the arm unit relay board 3259 and the forearm decoration board 3353 included in the forearm unit 3350 are provided.

Further, the arm unit 3250 is inserted into the first rotation shaft 3252 and the cylindrical first bush 3264 for rotatably supporting the upper arm unit 3300, and the second rotation shaft 3351a of the forearm unit 3350. And a cylindrical second bush 3265 for rotatably supporting the forearm unit 3350 with respect to the upper arm unit 3300.

The arm unit 3250 rear arm unit cover 3253 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the rear surface, the left side surface, and a part of the bottom surface are opened in a front view, and the base end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is housed inside. Thus, the upper arm unit 3300 extends outward from the opened left side surface and a part of the bottom surface. One end side of an upper arm assist spring 3303 in an upper arm unit 3300 described later is locked to the arm unit cover 3253.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 is rotatably supported on the first rotation shaft 3252 whose base end side is supported by the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253. An upper arm base 3301 that has a first shaft portion 3301a that extends in a predetermined direction in a plate shape, and a fan shape that is attached to the rear side of the first shaft portion 3301a in the upper arm base 3301 and has a first rotating shaft 3252 as a center. And an upper arm drive gear 3302 that is formed on the upper arm drive cover 3303 and is engaged with the small diameter gear 3256b of the transmission gear 3256. One end side is locked to the arm unit cover 3253 and the other end side is locked to the upper arm base 3301. An upper arm assist spring 3303 that applies a biasing force to the upper arm base 3301 so that the distal end side of the upper arm base 3301 rotates upward (clockwise in front view), and is attached to the front surface of the upper arm base 3301 And an upper arm decoration body 3304 which covers the above and imitates the upper arm of a predetermined character.

The upper arm base 3301 of the upper arm unit 3300 is formed in a cylindrical shape in which a first shaft portion 3301a provided on the base end side is shortly extended in the front-rear direction, and makes a first rotation via a first bush 3264 inside. The shaft 3252 is adapted to be inserted. Further, the upper arm base 3301 has a cylindrical second shaft portion 3301b extending in the front-rear direction with a second rotation shaft 3351a of a forearm unit 3350, which will be described later, inserted on the distal end side, and a center axis of the second shaft portion 3301b. Further, a slit 3301c formed in an arc shape and capable of restricting the rotation range of the forearm unit 3350 is further provided. The upper arm base 3301 is made of a light-transmitting material.

In the upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300, a portion of the transmission gear 3256 that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3256b spreads in a fan shape in a direction opposite to the tip end side of the upper arm unit with the axis of the first rotation shaft 3252 interposed therebetween. Has been formed. Further, the upper arm drive gear 3302 includes a detection piece 3302a detected by an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258 (see FIG. 163) attached to the arm unit cover 3253.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper arm assist spring 3303 of the upper arm unit 3300 is wound in a coil shape with the first rotating shaft 3252 as a substantially axial center, and the tip on one end side is bent so as to extend forward. The arm unit cover 3253 is locked at a predetermined position. The upper arm assist spring 3303 has a coiled portion arranged on the front side of the upper arm base 3301 and has the other end extending rearward through the through hole (not shown). It is adapted to be locked on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 (see FIG. 162).

The upper arm ornament 3304 of the upper arm unit 3300 is arranged on the proximal end side of the insertion hole 3304a through which the first shaft portion 3301a of the upper arm base 3301 can be inserted and in the vicinity of the insertion hole 3304a (upper left portion in front view), and will be described later. A motor mounting portion 3304b for mounting the forearm drive motor 3307 and a second shaft portion 3301b of the upper arm base 3301 formed on the distal end side can pass therethrough, and a distal end penetrating to the outer peripheral edge of the arcuate slit 3301c in a fan shape. An opening 3304c and a passage hole 3304d that extends in an arc shape around the axis of the second shaft portion 3301b on the upper side of the tip opening 3304c in the drawing are provided. The upper arm ornament 3304 is formed to have a light-transmitting property.

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 and the upper arm decoration board 3305 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 to the tip side of the second shaft portion 3301b. And a plate-shaped protection plate 3306 having a protrusion protruding rearward.

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 is mounted on the front motor mounting portion 3304b of the upper arm ornament 3304 and has a forearm drive motor 3307 having a rotation shaft extending rearward, and an upper arm ornament fixed on the rotation shaft of the forearm drive motor 3307. 3304 and the upper arm base 3301 are disposed between the drive gear 3308, the driven gear 3308 and the driven gear 3309 which is rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, and the large diameter large gear which meshes with the driven gear 3309. 3310a and a small-diameter gear 3310b of the large-diameter gear 3310a and a small-diameter gear 3310b which rotates integrally with the front surface of the large-diameter gear 3310a and has a smaller-diameter gear 3310b smaller than the large-diameter gear 3310a. And a crank pin 3311b protruding forward from a position separated by a predetermined distance from the shaft center of the drive gear portion 3311a, which is rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301. A transmission rotary body 3311 having a rod-like shape and a proximal end side rotatably supported by the crank pin 3311b of the transmission rotary body 3311 and a distal end side rotatably supported by the transmission pin 3351b in the forearm unit 3350. And a link member 3312.

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 has one end attached to a longitudinal intermediate portion of the link member 3312 and the other end attached to a predetermined position of the upper arm base 3301. A forearm assist spring 3313 that biases the arm to rotate in a counterclockwise direction) and a forearm rotational position detection sensor 3316 that detects the rotational position of the transmission rotary body 3311 are provided.

When the transmission rotary body 3311 of the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated, the crank pin 3311b revolves around a predetermined radius. Further, the transmission rotating body 3311 is provided with a slit 3311c extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis thereof, and a restriction protrusion 3301d protruding from the inner upper arm base 3301 of the slit 3311c is inserted therein. As a result, the transmission rotator 3311 can rotate only within the range of the slit 3311c extending in an arc shape. Further, the transmission rotating body 3311 includes a detection piece 3311d extending rearward. The detection piece 3311d extends to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 through the arcuate opening 3301e of the upper arm base 3301 and is attached to the upper arm decoration substrate 3305 on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301. It is adapted to be detected by the rotational position detection sensor 3316.

The upper arm unit 3300 further includes a lock bracket 3314 attached so as to cover a part of the forearm drive motor 3307 on the front surface of the upper arm ornament 3304, and a lock pin 3315 extending forward from the front surface of the lock bracket 3314. There is. The lock pin 3315 makes the upper arm unit 3300 a storage position extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and when the arm unit 3250 is set to the origin position by the arm slide unit 3210, the lock of the unit base 3401 in the back and front movable effect unit 3400. The upper arm unit 3300 is locked by the stop piece 3401e and can be prevented from rotating downward by being locked by the lock piece 3401e (see FIG. 174).

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the forearm unit 3350 of the arm unit 3250 has a second rotation shaft 3351a extending rearward from a predetermined position on the base end side and a predetermined amount of deviation from the second rotation shaft 3351a. A plate-like forearm base 3351 that extends rearward at a centered position and that has a transmission pin 3351b that rotatably supports the tip end side of the link member 3312 and that extends in a predetermined direction. And a forearm decoration body 3352 that covers the forearm of a predetermined character. In the forearm base 3351 of the forearm unit 3350, the transmission pin 3351b is arranged at a position diagonally lower left from the second rotation shaft 3351a in rear view. Further, the forearm decoration 3352 is formed to have a light-transmitting property.

Further, the forearm unit 3350 is arranged between the forearm decoration body 3352 and the forearm base 3351 and is arranged between the forearm decoration board 3353 and the forearm decoration board 3353 and the forearm decoration body 3352, in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a diffusing lens member 3354 for diffusing light from the LEDs of the forearm decoration substrate 3353. The forearm unit 3350 irradiates the forearm decoration 3352 with light from the LEDs of the forearm decoration substrate 3353 in a state where the light is widely diffused by the diffusion lens member 3354, and the entire forearm decoration 3352 is substantially evenly distributed. It can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

The transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350 is inserted into the arcuately extending slit 3301c of the upper arm base 3301 of the upper arm unit 3300, and a disc-shaped end member is attached to the rear end thereof. The slit 3301c is prevented from coming off. The forearm unit 3350 is configured to rotate only within the range of the slit 3301c of the upper arm base 3301 that extends in an arc shape around the axis of the second rotation shaft 3351a.

[2-10C. Movement of arm unit]
Next, the movement of the arm unit 3250 in the back-and-back movable effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 167(a) and the like, the arm unit 3250 of this example is in a state where it is moved to the rightmost side in the front view by the arm slide unit 3210 (state of origin position) in a normal state. Further, in the normal state, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 of the arm unit 3250 are in a state of extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 seem to overlap each other in a front view. It is in a state. In other words, in a normal state, the upper arm unit 3300 is in a state of extending in a substantially horizontal direction (stored position), and the forearm unit 3350 is in a state of overlapping with the upper arm unit 3300 (stored position). ing. As a result, the arm unit 3250 is almost invisible to the player. Further, as will be described later in detail, in the state of this normal position, the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is locked (locked) to the locking piece 3401e of the unit base 3401 in the back upper front movable effect unit 3400. The upper arm unit 3300 cannot rotate in the standby position (counterclockwise direction in front view).

First, the movement by the arm slide unit 3210 will be described. As described above, when the drive gear 3218 is rotationally driven in an appropriate direction (clockwise in the front view in this example) from the normal state by the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210, the drive gear 3218 is rotated. The rotation is transmitted to the pinion gear 3214 via the transmission gear 3217, the second transmission gear 3216, and the first transmission gear 3215, and the rotation of the pinion gear 3214 causes the slider 3213 to move to the left and right via the rack gear 3213a meshed with the pinion gear 3214. It slides in the direction (in this example, to the left when viewed from the front).

Then, when the slider 3213 of the arm slide unit 3210 slides, the arm unit 3250 attached to the front surface of the slider 3213 also slides, and the entire arm unit 3250 slides in the left-right direction (left direction) from the origin position. (See FIG. 167(b)). Even when the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration body 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decoration body 3352) overlap each other, the arm slide unit 3210 slides the arm unit 3250 in the left-right direction. The arm unit 3250 is almost invisible from the player side.

When the arm unit 3210 that has been slid leftward from the origin position is returned to the origin position, the arm slide drive motor 3219 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above to cause the arm unit 3210 via the slider 3213. The entire body can be slid rightward when viewed from the front, and can be returned to the original position.

Next, the movement of the upper arm unit 3300 by the arm unit 3250 will be described. From the normal state in which the upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 extends in the substantially horizontal direction (the state of the stored position), the drive gear 3255 is driven in a predetermined direction by the upper arm drive motor 3254 (in this example, a counterclockwise direction in a front view). When it is rotationally driven to, the rotation of the drive gear 3255 is transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300 via the transmission gear 3256, and the upper arm unit 3300 as a whole together with the upper arm drive gear 3302 has a tip about the first rotation shaft 3252. It will rotate so that the side moves downward (the appearance position side).

In this example, the transmission gear 3256 is arranged between the drive gear 3255 and the upper arm drive gear 3302, and the rotation from the upper arm drive motor 3254 is transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 while being decelerated by the transmission gear 3256. It is supposed to be done. That is, by interposing the transmission gear 3256, the rotational torque of the upper arm drive motor 3254 is amplified and transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 (upper arm unit 3300), and even if the weight of the upper arm unit 3300 side is heavy, The load on the drive motor 3254 can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the upper arm unit 3300 can be rotated within an angle range of about 90 degrees from a state of a substantially horizontal storage position to a state of a substantially vertical hanging position. (See FIG. 174(c)). Further, by driving the upper arm drive motor 3254, the forearm unit 3350 together with the upper arm unit 3300 also rotates about the first rotation shaft 3252.

When the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated from the storage position extending in the substantially horizontal direction to the appearance position in which the front end side is lower than the base end side, the front end side of the upper arm unit 3300 moves to the front surface side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, It is visible from the player side. It should be noted that when the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated in the direction of the appearance position while the forearm unit 3350 remains in the stored state in which the upper arm unit 3300 overlaps, what is actually seen from the player side is not the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300. The proximal end side of the forearm unit 3350 is visible, and most of the upper arm unit 3300 is hidden by the forearm unit 3350.

When returning the upper arm unit 3300 to the retracted position from the state in which the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 is located below the proximal end side (the state of the appearance position), the upper arm drive motor 3254 is driven in the opposite direction to the above. The upper arm unit 3300 can be rotated upward to rotate the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300 upward, and the upper arm unit 3300 can be returned to the storage position.

Next, the movement of the forearm unit 3350 in the arm unit 3250 will be described. As shown in FIG. 168(a), when the forearm unit 3350 extends substantially horizontally and overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 (normal state), the weight of the forearm unit 3350 rotatably supports the forearm unit 3350. A rotation moment that moves the tip end side of the forearm unit 3350 downward (rotates clockwise in front view) about the second rotation shaft 3351a is in a state of acting on the forearm unit 3350. Then, due to the rotational moment acting on the forearm unit 3350, the crank pin 3311b is moved in the direction of the transmission pin 3351b to the crank pin 3311b of the transmission rotator 3311 via the link member 3312 connected to the transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350. The pulling force will act.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 168(a), when the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 (in the stored position), the crank pin 3311b of the transmission rotary member 3311 is located at the center of the crank pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b. The axis connecting the center of the transmission rotary body 3311 is located above the center of the transmission rotary body 3311 (a position slightly revolved to one side), and the regulation projection 3301d contacts one end of the slit 3311c of the transmission rotary body 3311. They are in contact with each other. Then, in this state, when the pulling force in the direction of the transmission pin 3351b is applied to the crank pin 3311b of the transmission rotating body 3311 by the rotation moment applied to the forearm unit 3350, the crank pin 3311b approaches the transmission pin 3351b in the counterclockwise direction. However, since the regulation projection 3301d is in contact with one end of the slit 3311c of the transmission rotary body 3311, the transmission rotary body 3311 is rotated further in the counterclockwise direction. Therefore, the crank pin 3311b continues to stop in the current state without revolving. Therefore, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the retracted position, even if the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 acts on the crank pin 3311b via the link member 3312, the crank pin 3311b does not revolve and the transmission rotating body 3311 rotates. Without doing so, the forearm unit 3350 does not rotate naturally.

Then, in the arm unit 3250 of this example, the forearm unit 3350 is in the stored position where the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300, and the forearm drive motor 3307 attached to the upper arm unit 3300 causes the drive gear 3308 to move in an appropriate direction (in this example, the front face). When it is rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction), the rotation of the drive gear 3308 is transmitted to the drive gear portion 3311a via the driven gear 3309 and the transmission gear 3310, and the transmission rotating body 3311 including the drive gear portion 3311a is transmitted. The crank pin 3311b provided on the transmission rotary body 3311 rotates and revolves around a shaft center of the transmission rotary body 3311 at a predetermined radius. The crank pin 3311b is pivotally supported at the base end side of a link member 3312 whose tip side is pivotally supported by the transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350, and when the crank pin 3311b revolves, transmission is performed via the link member 3312. The pin 3351b revolves around the axis of the second rotation shaft 3351a, and the forearm unit 3350 rotates in a direction in which the tip side of the forearm unit 3350 separates from the upper arm unit 3300 (direction of deployed position, clockwise direction in front view). Becomes

As described above, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the retracted position, the revolving position of the crank pin 3311b is the axis connecting the center of the crank pin 3311b and the center of the transmission pin 3351b. Since the position is slightly revolved to the one side (counterclockwise direction) with respect to the center, when the transmission rotary body 3311 is rotated clockwise by the forearm drive motor 3307, the crank pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b are rotated. The crank pin 3311b pulls the transmission pin 3351b toward the transmission rotator 3311 via the link member 3312 until the axis line connecting the two passes through the center of the transmission rotator 3311, and the forearm unit 3350 makes the second rotation. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft 3351a. Then, when the crank pin 3311b further rotates in the clockwise direction and the axis connecting the crank pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b moves below the center of the transmission rotator 3311, the crank pin 3311b moves the link member 3312. The transmission pin 3351b is pushed away from the transmission rotary body 3311 via the, and the forearm unit 3350 rotates in the clockwise direction around the second rotation shaft 3351a.

In this example, the forearm unit 3350 can rotate in a clockwise direction in a front view within a range of about 60 degrees from a storage position overlapping the upper arm unit 3300.

Although illustration is omitted, in the back-up/back-movable effect unit 3200 of this example, the sliding movement of the arm unit 3250 in the left-right direction, the rotation of the upper arm unit 3300, and the rotation of the forearm unit 3350 are independently performed. Since the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be simultaneously rotated, or the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be simultaneously rotated at the same time as sliding, the movement of various patterns can be performed. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make a more natural movement as a movable effect unit that imitates the arm of a predetermined character, and to strongly attract the player's interest.

[2-11. Front and back movable production unit]
Next, the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. FIG. 169 is a perspective view of the back-up front movable effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the back-up front movable effect unit seen from the back. Also, FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper front movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper front movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 173 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back-and-front movable production unit.

The front-rear movable production unit 3400 is arranged on the front side of the rear-rear movable production unit 3200 and attached to the front surface of the back box 3001. The front-rear movable production unit 3400 is mounted on the front surface of the back box 3001 and the rear-rear front which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3401 and penetrates the unit base 3401 to extend the rotation axis forward. The drive motor 3402, the drive gear 3403 which is fixed to the rotation shaft of the rear front drive motor 3402 and is arranged on the front surface side of the unit base 3401, the gear portion 3404a which meshes with the drive gear 3403, and the front surface of the gear portion 3404a rotate. A drive rotor 3404 having a crank pin 3404b extending forward from a position eccentric from the center and rotatably supported by a unit base 3401, and a crank pin 3404a of the drive rotor 3404 slide in the left-right direction. The slotted first slit 3405a that can be inserted, and the first slit 3405a are extended rearward from a position on the left side of the first slit 3405a in front view and on the left side of the drive rotating body 3404 and supported slidably in the vertical direction by the unit base 3401. A pair of slide support shafts 3405b, and a link member 3405 arranged on the front side of the drive rotor 3404, which is provided on the left side of the slide support shafts 3405b and has a second slit 3405c elongated in the left-right direction. The transmission pin 3406a that is slidably inserted into the second slit 3405c of the member 3405 and extends rearward, and the rotation that is arranged at a position on the left side in front view of the transmission pin 3406a and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3401. A front and back decorative body 3406 which is provided with a shaft 3406b, extends in a predetermined direction with the side where the rotating shaft 3406b and the transmission pin 3406a are arranged as a base end side, and is formed in a shape imitating a predetermined item. There is.

The unit base 3401 of the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 has a shape in which the upper end extends in the left-right direction and a portion on the left side in front view extends downward from the substantially center of the upper end in the left-right direction. The pair of guide rollers 3262 of the arm unit 3250 in the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 can come into contact with each other and roll in the left-right direction. In addition, the unit base 3401 includes a motor mounting portion 3401a for mounting the back-up front drive motor 3402 on the rear side of the left end in rear view, and a pair of slide supports of the link member 3405 arranged on the left side of the motor mounting portion 3401a in front view. A vertically extending elongated vertical guide slit 3401b into which the shaft 3405b is slidably inserted, and a rotary shaft 3406b of the back front decorative body 3406 which is arranged on the left side of the vertical guide slit 3401b in a front view are inserted. Shaft hole 3401c, and a rotation guide slit 3401d penetrating in an arc shape around the axis of the shaft hole 3401c.

Further, the unit base 3401 of the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 includes a locking piece 3401e which is arranged on the left side in front view with respect to the rotation guide slit 3401d and which projects leftward. By arranging the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 of the back-and-back movable effect unit 3200 on the upper side of the locking piece 3401e, it is possible to restrict the lock pin 3315 from moving downward. The unit 3300 can be locked so as to rotate naturally.

In the link member 3405 of the front and rear movable effect unit 3400, a first slit 3405a having a long hole shape is formed to have a length substantially the same as the revolution radius of the crank pin 3404b in the drive rotor 3404. Further, in the link member 3405, a pair of slide support shafts 3405b which are vertically separated from each other are arranged at positions substantially symmetrical with respect to the upper and lower sides about the axis of the first slit 3405a extending in the left and right directions. Further, the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 is arranged at a position substantially coaxial with the axis of the first slit 3405a extending in the left-right direction.

The link member 3405 is configured to be slidably supported in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of slide support shafts 3405b into the vertical guide slit 3401b of the unit base 3401, and is inserted into the first slit 3405a. The crank pin 3404b of the driven rotating body 3404 thus revolved is slid in the vertical direction. The pair of slide support shafts 3405b of the link member 3405 are slidably inserted into the vertical guide slits 3401b through the guide bushes 3407 inserted on both front and rear sides with the unit base 3401 interposed therebetween. ..

The back-up front decorative body 3406 of the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 is configured to extend in a predetermined direction and is rotatably inserted from the rear surface on the base end side to the rear into the shaft hole 3401c of the unit base 3401 via the bush 3408. The rotating shaft 3406b is extended. Further, when the rear upper front decorative body 3406 is in a state of extending in the left-right direction such that the base end side is the right side in the front view, it is obliquely lower right (about 45 degrees axis in front view with respect to the rotating shaft 3406b. A transmission pin 3406a inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 extends from the position (on the line) to the rear.

Further, the back-up front decorative body 3406 is a pair of guide pins that extend rearward from a position on the opposite side of the transmission pin 3406a with the rotating shaft 3406b interposed therebetween and are arranged on the circumference around the rotating shaft 3406b. 3406c is provided. The pair of guide pins 3406c of the back front decorative body 3406 are slidably inserted into the rotation guide slit 3401d of the unit base 3401 via the guide bush 3409, and the rotation shaft 3406b is centered. As a result, when the back-up front decorative body 3406 is rotated, it is possible to suppress the back-up front decorative body 3406 from swinging as much as possible, and it is possible to smoothly rotate on the same surface.

Further, the back-up front decorative body 3406 includes a detection piece 3406d detected by a back-up front rotating position detection sensor 3410 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3401, and the back-up front decorative body 3406 is moved in the substantially left-right direction. At the extended position (storage position), the detection piece 3406d is detected by the back-up front rotation position detection sensor 3410.

Next, the movement of the back-up front decorative body 3406 in the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, the front-rear decoration 3406 is in a storage position extending in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 173(a). In this state (state of the stored position), the back upper front decorative body 3406 is located above the liquid crystal display device 1900, hidden behind the center accessory 2500, and almost invisible from the player side.

Further, in the state where the back-up front decorative body 3406 is in the normal position (stored position), the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404 is in the lowest position (bottom dead center). In this state, the load of the back upper front decorative body 3406 causes a rotation moment for rotating the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view about the rotation shaft 3406b. Thus, a force to raise the link member 3405 acts via the transmission pin 3406a. However, since the crank pin 3404b inserted in the first slit 3405a of the link member 3405 is located at the bottom dead center, the transmission rotary body 3404 does not rotate even when an upward force acts on the crank pin 3404b. Instead, the back front decorative body 3406 continues to maintain the state of the stored position against the rotation moment.

Then, when the back-up front decorative body 3406 is in the storage position, the drive gear 3403 is rotationally driven by the back-up front drive motor 3402 in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise in a front view in this example). The drive rotator 3404 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3404a that meshes with the crank pin 3404b, and the crank pin 3404b is also revolved in the clockwise direction from the position of the bottom dead center. When the crank pin 3404b revolves, the crank pin 3404b rises, and the link member 3405 also rises as the crank pin 3404b rises. When the link member 3405 rises, the transmission pin 3406a of the back front decorative body 3406 inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 rises, and the back front decorative body 3406 is lifted by the raising of the transmission pin 3406a. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view about the rotation shaft 3406b.

When the back-up front decorative body 3406 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the front end side of the back-up front decorative body 3406 moves downward, and the front end side of the back-up front decorative body 3406 moves toward the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It comes down to and can be seen from the player side. When the back front drive motor 3402 reaches the top dead center where the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotor 3404 is located at the uppermost position, the back front drive motor 3402 stops rotating and the link member 3405 stops rising. At the same time, the rotation of the back-up front decorative body 3406 is also stopped.

In this example, when the crank pin 3404b is revolved to the top dead center as shown in FIG. 173(b), the back upper front decorative body 3406 is rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the storage position. It is in a rotated state (standby position state).

In addition, in the case where the front-up front decorative body 3406 is returned from the appearance position in which the front end side is located below the base end side to the storage position in which the base end side and the front end side have substantially the same height, By rotating the back-up front drive unit 3402 in the opposite direction to the above, the link member 3405 can be lowered via the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404, and the back-up front can be lowered by lowering the link member 3405. The decorative body 3406 can be rotated clockwise around the rotation shaft 3406b in a front view to return to the storage position.

[2-12. Relationship between front and rear movable production units and rear and rear movable production units]
Next, the relationship between the back-up front movable production unit 3400 and the back-up rear movable production unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the back-up front movable production unit and the back-up rear movable production unit in the back unit, and FIG. 175 shows the back-up front movable production unit and the back-up rear movable production unit following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of.

As shown in FIG. 174 and the like, the relationship between the back-up front movable production unit 3400 and the back-up rear movable production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 is that the back-up rear movable production unit 3200 is directly behind the back-up front movable production unit 3400. It is in the state of being arranged, and the back-up front decorative body 3406 of the back-up front movable production unit 3400, the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration body 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decoration body) 3352) are formed to have substantially the same size. The upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decoration 3352) are in the storage position shown in FIG. 174(a) in a normal state.

In addition, the front back movable production unit 3400 and the back rear movable production unit 3200 are in a normal state (a state in which the back front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 are in the storage position, FIG. )), the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are almost hidden behind the back front decoration 3406, and the back front decoration positioned above the liquid crystal display device 1900. The upper arm ornament 3304 and the forearm ornament 3352 are hidden from the player side by being hidden behind 3406 and the center accessory 2500. Further, in this normal state, the lock pin 3315 of the forearm unit 3300 in the rear upper rear movable effect unit 3200 abuts on the locking piece 3401e of the unit base 3401 in the rear upper movable effect unit 3400, and moves downward. Is locked (locked).

From this normal state, the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210 in the back and rear movable effect unit 3200 is driven to slide the arm unit 3250 to the left in a front view, and the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is moved. The lock pin 3315 of is moved to a position on the left side of the locking piece 3401e of the unit base 3401 in the front-rear movable effect unit 3400 (see FIG. 174(b)). As a result, the lock pin 3315 can move downward, and the lock is released.

Subsequently, the back-up front drive motor 3402 of the back-up front movable production unit 3400 and the upper-arm drive motor 3254 of the back-up rear movable production unit 3200 are simultaneously driven, and the back-up front decoration body 3406 and the upper arm decoration body 3304 ( And the forearm decoration 3352) are rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 174(c)). In the state of FIG. 174(c), the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the upper arm decorative body 3304 are both substantially in the standby position (the state of rotating from the storage position to the counterclockwise direction by about 90 degrees). Thus, the upper arm ornament 3304 and the forearm ornament 3352 are almost hidden behind the back upper front ornament 3406.

With the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3304 rotated to the standby position, the upper arm drive motor 3254 rotates the upper arm decorative body 3304 clockwise in the front view, and the front arm drive motor 3307 rotates the front arm decorative body 3304. The forearm decoration 3352 is rotated in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 175(d)). As a result, the base end side of the upper arm decoration body 3304 moves away from the back upper front decoration body 3406 to the left, and the tip end side moves away from the upper arm decoration body 3304 from the state in which the forearm decoration body 3352 overlaps with the upper arm decoration body 3304. Then, a part of the upper arm ornament 3304 and the forearm ornament 3352 appears from the rear side of the back upper front ornament 3406.

Then, in this state, when the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210 moves the arm unit 3250 to the left in a front view, the front end side of the forearm unit 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406 is It moves to the left of the front upper decorative body 3406, and the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is in the appearance position visible from the player side (see FIG. 175(e)).

In this way, a high-impact movable production in which the back-up front decorative body 3406 of the back-up front movable production unit 3400, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 of the back-up rear movable production unit 3200 are combined is performed. It is possible to entertain the player. In addition to the above, the back-up movable decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 can be independently moved at various timings to perform a movable effect of various patterns. You can do it and not get tired of it.

[2-13. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back lower back movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 176 to 184. FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the back lower back movable effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit as seen from the back. Also, FIG. 178 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit disassembled into a rear-bottom rear decorative body unit, a lifting unit, etc., and FIG. 179 is a rear-bottom rear movable effect unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative body unit, the lifting unit, and the like, which are disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower back decorative body unit of the rear lower back movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower rear decorative body unit as seen from the rear. It is a perspective view. In addition, FIG. 182 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lower back rear decorative body unit. In addition, FIG. 183 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of an elevating unit in the back lower rear movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back bottom rear movable effect unit.

The lower back movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and in front of the back middle movable effect unit 3100. This back under-rear movable production unit 3500 is a back under-rear decoration unit 3510 having a decoration imitating a tiled roof building, and a back under-rear decoration unit 3510 is moved up and down in accordance with a game state and a back box. An elevating unit 3550 mounted inside 3001 and a rear lower back decorative substrate 3501 mounted on the rear side of the rear lower rear decorative unit 3510 are provided. This rear-bottom rear decorative substrate 3501 is provided with a plurality of LEDs that are turned on and off depending on the number of lottery results held by the start winning.

The back lower back decoration unit 3510 in the back lower back movable effect unit 3500 is arranged below the first decoration 3511 and the first decoration 3511 extending in the left-right direction and formed in a shape simulating the roof of a building. A horizontally elongated second decorative body 3512 formed in a shape imitating a wall of a building, and is arranged in front of the second decorative body 3512, is formed in a shape imitating a gable of a building, and from the center in the left-right direction to the left and right. The back lower back movable decoration body 3513 (left movable body 3513L, right movable body 3513R) and the back bottom rear movable decoration body 3513 which are separable are supported slidably in the left and right directions respectively, and the second decoration body 3512 is provided on the front surface. A shallow box-shaped unit cover 3514 which is attached to the left side and is open to the rear side, and a horizontally long plate-shaped unit in which the rear side of the unit cover 3514 is closed and both left and right ends are attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 of the elevating unit 3550. And a base 3515.

The first decorative body 3511 of the rear lower back decorative body unit 3510 is provided with a plurality of hemispherical retained number display portions 3511a arranged in the left-right direction on the upper end thereof, and is arranged on the rear side. The LEDs for holding display provided on the decorative substrate 3501 emit light. The hold number display unit 3511a can display the hold number according to the number of emitted lights.

The second decorative body 3512 of the lower back rear decorative body unit 3510 has a laterally long opening 3512a formed substantially at the center in the left-right direction as illustrated. Further, the unit cover 3514 of the lower back rear decorative body unit 3510 extends further downward from the lower left side of the rectangular portion extending in the left-right direction in a front view, and is a motor mounting portion for mounting the lower back rear opening/closing drive motor 3516. 3514a, and a left slit 3514b and a right slit 3514a formed in the lower part of a rectangular portion extending in the left-right direction on the right side when viewed from the front of the motor mounting portion 3514a and extending in the left-right direction and arranged in the left-right direction. 3514c.

In addition, the back lower rear opening/closing drive unit 3510 is attached to the left front surface of the unit cover 3514, and the back lower rear opening/closing drive motor 3516 penetrates through the unit cover 3514 and the rotation shaft extends rearward. A drive gear 3517 fixed to the rotary shaft of 3516 and arranged between the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and a first transmission gear meshing with the drive gear 3517 and rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515. 3518, a second transmission gear 3519 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3518 and is rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and meshes with the second transmission gear 3519 and can rotate with the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515. A left pinion gear 3520 supported by the unit cover 3514 and a left rack gear 3521a that meshes with the left pinion gear 3520 and extends in the left-right direction and is supported by the unit cover 3514 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. ..

The left slider 3521 of the rear lower back decorative body unit 3510 extends downward from the right end of the left rack gear 3521a extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends downward from the lower end of the downward hanging portion 3521b. And a pair of mounting bosses 3521c which are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and which penetrate the left slit 3514b of the unit cover 3514 and whose front end is mounted on the lower rear surface of the left movable body 3513L in the rear lower rear movable decoration body 3513. There is. The left slider 3521 can be slid in the left-right direction by inserting the pair of mounting bosses 3521c into the left slit 3514b of the unit cover 3514, and is attached to the mounting boss 3521c of the left slider 3521. The left movable body 3513L is also slidable in the left-right direction.

Further, the left slider 3521 is formed at the upper end of the hanging piece 3521b at the upper end of the extending portion 3521d extending in the shape of a bar long in the direction opposite to the left rack gear 3521a (rightward when viewed from the front) and at the lower right end of the extending portion 3521d. A right transmission rack gear 3521e extending in the left-right direction and a detection piece 3521f protruding forward from the left end of the extending portion 3521d are provided. The left slider 3521 is in a state of being biased rightward when viewed from the front by a tension spring 3531.

Further, the lower back rear decorative body unit 3510 meshes with the right transmission rack gear 3521e of the left slider 3521 and is rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515. The right pinion gear 3522 and the right pinion gear 3522 sandwich the right pinion gear 3522. A right slider 3523, which is arranged on the side opposite to the transmission rack gear 3521e and has a right rack gear 3523a extending in the left-right direction, which meshes with the right pinion gear 3522; and a right slider 3523 supported by the unit cover 3514 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Further equipped.

The right slider 3523 of the rear lower rear decorative body unit 3510 extends forward from the left front surface of the right rack gear 3523a extending in the left-right direction and is spaced apart in the left-right direction from the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514. It has a pair of mounting bosses 3523b penetrating therethrough and attached to the lower rear surface of the right movable body 3513R in the back lower rear movable decoration body 3513. The right slider 3523 is configured to be slidable in the left and right direction by inserting the pair of mounting bosses 3523b into the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514, and is mounted on the mounting boss 3523b of the right slider 3523. The right movable body 3513R is also slidable in the left-right direction.

The pair of mounting bosses 3521c of the left slider 3521 and the pair of mounting bosses 3523b of the right slider 3523 are slidably supported on the left slit 3514b and the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514 via slide bushes 3530, respectively. It has become so.

Further, the lower back rear decorative body unit 3510 is arranged between the second decorative body 3512 and the unit cover 3514 so as to face the front side through the opening 3512a of the second decorative body 3512 and has a translucent plate shape. It includes a guide lens member 3524 and a back lower rear middle decorative substrate 3525 that is arranged on the rear side of the guide lens member 3524 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The front side of the guide lens member 3524 facing from the opening 3512a of the second decorative body 3512 is hidden by the back under-back movable decorative body 3513 and is visible from the player side when the under-back movable decorative body 3513 is in a closed state. There is no such thing.

Although not shown, the guide lens member 3524 is provided with predetermined characters and decorations according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. By illuminating the LEDs of the back and rear interior decoration substrate 3525, light is emitted. It can be decorated. In addition, an open/close position detection sensor for detecting the slide position of the left slider 3521 (back lower back movable decoration 3513) by detecting the detection piece 3521f of the left slider 3521 on the rear surface of the back lower back middle decorative substrate 3525. 3526 is attached.

Further, the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 is mounted on the rear side of the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R of the back lower back movable decorative body 3513, respectively, and an auxiliary member 3527 mounted on the rear side of the unit cover 3514 for driving. The light from the gear cover 3528 that covers the rear surface of the gear 3517 and the LED for decoration mounted on the front side of the lower back decorative substrate 3501 is guided to the rear surface of the first decorative body 3511 and the entire first decorative body 3511 emits light. And a light guide member 3529 for decoration.

In the normal state (closed position), the rear-under-back movable decorative unit 3510 in the rear-lower-back movable effect unit 3500 of the present example is, as shown in FIG. The movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are in contact with each other, and the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R become gables. Although not shown, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are respectively provided with magnets arranged in a direction in which they attract each other, and are difficult to separate when they come into contact with each other.

Further, in a normal state, the left rack gear 3521a of the left slider 3521 and the right transmission rack gear 3521e are in mesh with the left pinion gear 3520 and the right pinion gear 3522 at a position substantially at the left end in a front view. Further, the right rack gear 3523a of the right slider 3523 meshes with the right pinion gear 3522 at a position at the substantially right end when viewed from the front.

When the drive gear 3517 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise in a front view in this example) from the normal state by the back-bottom rear opening/closing drive motor 3516, the first transmission gear 3518 and the second transmission gear 3519 are driven. The left pinion gear 3520 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the left rack gear 3521a meshed on the upper side of the left pinion gear 3520 moves the left slider 3521 to the left.

When the left slider 3521 moves leftward when viewed from the front, the right transmission rack gear 3521e provided at the right end of the left slider 3521 also moves leftward. It turns in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. Then, the right rack gear 3523a meshed under the right pinion gear 3522 moves the right slider 3523 to the right.

Therefore, when the drive gear 3517 is rotated in a predetermined direction (clockwise in a front view) by the back-bottom rear opening/closing drive motor 3516, the left slider 3521 moves to the left and the right slider 3523 moves to the right at the same time. Therefore, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R attached to the left slider 3521 and the right slider 3523, respectively, move in directions away from each other.

When the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R move in directions away from each other, the back lower rear movable decorative body 3513 is separated from the center in the left-right direction, that is, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R. By moving in a direction in which they move away from each other, the back under-rear movable decorative body 3513 operates so as to open, and the back under-rear movable decorative body 3513 is located between the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R. The front surface side of the guide lens member 3524 disposed at is visible.

Then, when the left slider 3521 and the right slider 3523 reach the left moving end and the right moving end, respectively, the driving of the lower back rear opening/closing drive motor 3516 is stopped and at the same time, the movements of the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are also stopped. , The movable decorative body 3513 is opened under the back (see FIG. 182(b)).

In addition, when the back underside movable decorative body 3513 is returned from the open position to the normal closed position, the underside back opening/closing drive motor 3516 is rotated in the opposite direction to the above to move to the left. The body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R can be moved toward each other, and the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R can be moved until they come into contact with each other, so that the normal state can be restored. Has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 178, FIG. 179, and FIG. 183, the elevating unit 3550 in the rear lower back movable effect unit 3500 includes a horizontally long plate-shaped unit body base 3551 attached to the back box 3001 and a unit body base 3551. Of the lifting rack gear 3552 which is attached to the front surface of the unit in the left-right direction and extends in the vertical direction, and the lifting rack gear 3552 which is disposed close to the left-side lifting rack gear 3552 in front view and is supported by the unit main body base 3551 and extends in the vertical direction. A rod-shaped lifting shaft 3553, a plate-shaped left pedestal 3554 supported by the lifting shaft 3553 so as to be vertically movable, and a box-shaped left gear box 3555 attached to the front surface of the left pedestal 3554 so as to extend forward. And a lower back rear elevation drive motor 3556 mounted on the left side surface of the left gear box 3555 when viewed from the front and having a rotation shaft extending into the left gear box 3555, and a left gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the rear bottom rear elevation drive motor 3556. The drive gear 3557 arranged in the box 3555, a large-diameter large-diameter gear 3558a that meshes with the drive gear 3557, and a small-diameter gear 3558b that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3558a and has a smaller diameter than the large-diameter gear 3558a are left. A transmission gear 3558 rotatably supported by a gear box 3555 meshes with a small-diameter gear 3558b of the transmission gear 3558, and also meshes with a lift rack gear 3552 arranged on the left side in a front view, and is rotatably supported by a left gear box 3555. A left pinion gear 3559,

Further, the lifting unit 3550 in the rear lower back movable effect unit 3500 includes a vertically extending guide support member 3560 attached to the front surface of the unit main body base 3551 adjacent to the right lifting rack gear 3552 in front view. A right pedestal 3561 slidably supported in the vertical direction by 3560, a box-shaped right gear box 3562 attached to the front surface of the right pedestal 3561 so as to extend forward, and a guide support penetrating the right gear box 3562. One end (right end in front view) is rotatably and slidably supported in the vertical direction by the member 3560, and the other end (left end in front view) is rotatably supported by the left gear box 3555 and is left. A drive shaft 3563 in which a pinion gear 3559 is rotatably fixed and extends in the left-right direction, and a right pinion gear 3564 which is rotatably fixed in the right gear box 3562 in the drive shaft 3563 and meshes with a right-side lifting rack gear 3552. , Are provided.

Further, the lifting unit 3550 in the rear lower back movable effect unit 3500 has a shaft cover 3565 having left and right ends attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 and covering the drive shaft 3563, and a lamp drive attached to the front surface of the left pedestal 3554. A relay substrate 3566 for relaying the connection between the substrate 3013 and the motor drive substrate 3015, the back lower rear opening/closing drive driving motor 3516 of the back lower rear decorative body unit 3510, the back lower rear intermediate decorative substrate 3525, and the unit body base 3551. And a wiring holding member 3567 that is attached to a position on the left side of the left pedestal 3554 in front view and that can hold wiring, and a wiring holding member 3567 that extends in the up-and-down direction, and a lower back decoration unit 3510 that is attached to the lower portion of the wiring holding member 3567. And an ascending/descending position detection sensor 3568 (see FIG. 184) for detecting the ascending/descending position of the. The up-and-down position detection sensor 3568 can detect the up-and-down position of the lower back rear decorative body unit 3510 by detecting the detection piece 3555a (see FIG. 184) provided on the left gear box 3555. ing.

As shown in FIG. 183, the left pedestal 3554 of the lifting/lowering unit 3550 is supported by a plurality of rollers 3569 that are in contact with the lifting/lowering shaft 3553 so as to be vertically movable. Further, the elevating unit 3550 is attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 at the left and right ends of the unit base 3515 of the lower back rear decorative body unit 3510, respectively.

In this elevating unit 3550, when the drive gear 3557 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction by the rear lower rear elevating drive motor 3556, the left pinion gear 3559 is rotated at the same time as the left pinion gear 3559 is rotated via the transmission gear 3558 that meshes with the drive gear 3557. The right pinion gear 3564 arranged on the right side via the drive shaft 3563 that constitutes the rotation axis of 3559 also rotates in the same direction as the left pinion gear 3559. When the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564 rotate at the same time, the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564 mesh with the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564, respectively. The pinion gear 3564 will move up and down.

In other words, by rotating the back lower rear elevating drive motor 3556, the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3562 rotatably supporting the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564, respectively. Since 3561 moves in the vertical direction, the lower back rear decorative body unit 3510 attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 can also be moved in the vertical direction.

Next, the movement of the lower back moving effect unit 3500 will be described. In this normal state, the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 is in a state in which the back-bottom rear movable decoration unit 3510 is positioned below by the elevating unit 3550, and the back-lower rear movable decoration body 3513 is closed ( It is in the closed position) (see FIG. 184(a)). In this normal state, a part of the first decorative body 3511 and the rear-bottom rear movable decorative body 3513 in the back-bottom rear decorative body unit 3510 can be seen from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500 ( (See FIG. 108 etc.).

Then, from this normal state, the rear lower back raising/lowering drive motor 3556 is rotationally driven to raise the entire lower back rear decorative body unit 3510 from the lowered position to the raised position (see FIG. 184(b)). As a result, the first decorative body 3511, the second decorative body 3512, and the rear lower back movable decorative body 3513 of the rear lower back decorative body unit 3510 are located above the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 from the player side. It will be visible enough.

With the back lower rear decorative body unit 3510 moved to the raised position, the back lower rear opening/closing drive motor 3516 moves the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R of the back lower rear movable decorative body 3513 in the directions in which they are separated from each other. By doing so, the state of the closed position where they are in contact with each other is changed to the state of the open position where they are separated from each other. When the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are in an open position where they are separated from each other, the front surface of the guide lens member 3524 disposed on the rear side between the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R is on the player side. It becomes visible from the bottom (see FIG. 184(c)). In this state, the guide lens member 3524 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the back lower back middle decoration substrate 3525 arranged on the rear side of the guide lens member 3524 emit light, and the game can be performed by the light emission decoration of the guide lens member 3524. People can be made to suggest the arrival of opportunities.

In addition to the above-described movement, the movement of the back-bottom back movable effect unit 3500 may be performed by the back-bottom back decoration unit 3510 before the back-bottom back decoration unit 3510 is moved to the raised position by the elevating unit 3550. After the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R of the rear movable decorative body 3513 are changed from the closed position state to the open position state, the back lower rear decorative body unit 3510 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. May be.

[2-14. Front and back movable production unit]
Next, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 to 189. FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 186 is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit seen from the back. In addition, FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 189 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back lower front movable effect unit.

The back lower front movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and is attached to the front surface of the ball guiding unit 3060, and from the stage 2510 of the center role object 2500. Is also visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1200 at the lower position (see FIG. 109 etc.). As shown in the figure, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 includes a lower back front left unit 3600L and a lower back front right unit 3600R which are provided on both left and right sides of the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction. The back lower front left unit 3600L and the back lower front right unit 3600R are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the left-right direction.

The back lower front movable effect unit 3600 (back lower front left unit 3600L and back lower front right unit 3600R) is a shallow box-shaped unit base 3601 which is attached to the front surface of the ball guiding unit 3060 and whose front is open, and a unit base. In the box of 3601, a back lower front first decorative body 3602 arranged in a position closer to the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and formed in a shape simulating a lantern, and a back lower front front decorative body 3602 of the game area 1100 A second back lower front decoration 3603 which is arranged on the opposite side (outer side) with respect to the center in the left-right direction and imitates a lantern and is formed to be slightly smaller than the first back lower front decoration 3602, and a second back lower front decoration A back under-front third decorative body 3604 which is arranged on the opposite side (outside) with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 in the body 3603 and imitates a lantern and which is formed to be slightly smaller than the under-back front second decorative body 3603. , Are provided.

The front lower back first decorative body 3062 of the front lower back movable effect unit 3600 extends rearward from a rotation shaft 3602a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the rear surface and a position lower than the rotary shaft 3602a. And an operating shaft 3602b. Further, the back lower front second decorative body 3063 includes a rotating shaft 3603a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the rear surface, and an operating shaft 3603b extending rearward from a position lower than the rotating shaft 3603a. I have it. Further, the back lower front third decorative body 3604 includes a rotating shaft 3604a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end on the rear surface and an operating shaft 3604b extending rearward from a position lower than the rotating shaft 3604a. I have it. Weights are attached to the lower back front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 near the lower ends thereof.

The unit base 3601 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is a first bearing portion for rotatably supporting the back lower front first decorative body 3602 into which the rotating shaft 3602a of the front lower front decorative body 3602 is inserted. 3601a, a first opening 3601b formed on the lower side of the first bearing portion 3601a through which the operating shaft 3602b of the back lower front decorative body 3602 can pass, and the rotation of the back lower front second decorative body 3603 A second bearing 3601c for inserting the shaft 3603a to rotatably support the back lower front third decorative body 3603 and an operation of the back lower front second decorative body 3603 formed below the second bearing 3601c. The second opening 3601d through which the shaft 3603b is allowed to pass, and the rotation shaft 3604a of the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are inserted, and the third for supporting the back lower front third decorative body 3604 rotatably. It is provided with a bearing portion 3601e and a third opening portion 3601f formed below the third bearing portion 3601e and through which the operating shaft 3604b of the back lower front third decorative body 3604 can pass.

The first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear portion 3601f of the unit base 3601 are circles centering on the axes of the first bearing 3601a, the second bearing 3601c, and the third bearing 3601e, respectively. It is formed so as to extend in an arc shape, and in the first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear portion 3601f, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and The respective actuating shafts 3602b, 3603b, 3604b of the lower back front third decorative body 3604 are allowed to move freely. Further, in the unit base 3601, the first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third opening 3601d are centered around the axes of the first bearing 3601a, the second bearing 3601c, and the third bearing 3601e, respectively. It is provided with arcuate guide grooves 3601g formed on the lower front surface of the portion 3601f.

With respect to the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e of this unit base 3601, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front first The rotating shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a of the three ornaments 3604 are rotatably inserted and supported via the bushes 3605. Further, through the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e of the unit base 3601, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third. Revolving shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a of the decorative body 3604 extend to the rear side of the unit base 3601. Further, through the first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear 3601f of the unit base 3601, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third. The respective actuating shafts 3602b, 3603b, 3604b of the decorative body 3604 extend to the rear side of the unit base 3601.

In addition, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 has one end on each of the operating shafts 3602b, 3603b, 3604b of the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604. Each of them has a protrusion 3606a which is inserted into the corresponding guide groove 3601g of the unit base 3601 and is inserted into the other end side thereof. The back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, And a rotation restricting member 3606 attached to the rear side of the back lower front third decorative body 3604, respectively. The rotation restricting member 3606 is provided with a protrusion 3606a which is inserted into the guide groove 3601g of the unit base 3601 so that the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body. The rotation range of the 3604 can be restricted so as not to rotate beyond the range of the guide groove 3601g.

In addition, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is arranged on the rear side of the unit base 3601, and is provided in the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604. Crank pins 3607a extending rearward from positions different from the axes of the rotary shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a, which are mounted over the rear ends of the moving shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a and the operating shafts 3602b, 3603b, 3604b, respectively. It has a first crank member 3607 having 3608a and 3609a, a second crank member 3608, and a third crank member 3609. In this example, the crank pins 3607a and 3609a of the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609 are coaxial with the operation shafts 3602b and 3604b of the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604. The crank pin 3608a of the second crank member 3608 is arranged on the opposite side of the operation shaft 3603b of the second lower back front decorative body 3603 with the rotation shaft 3603a interposed therebetween. ..

Furthermore, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is slidable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 are Each of the sliders 3610 includes a slider 3610 having a transmission portion 3610a that is inserted in a loosely fitted state, and a back lower front drive solenoid 3611 that drives the slider 3610 to move in the left-right direction. By sliding the slider 3610 in the left-right direction by the under-front drive solenoid 3611, the cranks of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 that are inserted into the transmission portion 3610a of the slider 3610. The pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a can be moved in the left-right direction to rotate the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 around the axes of the rotation shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a. By the rotation of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decoration The body 3604 can be rotated.

Further, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is arranged between the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 and the slider 3610, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3601. A plate-like slide having an opening 3612a through which the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609 of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 can pass, and which supports the slider 3610 in the left-right direction. A base 3612 and a unit cover 3613 that is attached to the rear side of the slide base 3612 and covers the rear side of the slider 3610 and the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 are provided.

Further, the back under front movable effect unit 3600 is arranged between the unit base 3601 and the slide base 3612, is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3601, and the under under front decoration with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A substrate 3614 is provided. In this example, the unit base 3601, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are formed to have translucency, respectively. By appropriately causing the LEDs of the back lower front decorative substrate 3614 to emit light, the front lower back first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, the back lower front third decorative body 3604, and the like can be caused to emit light. You can do it.

Next, the movement of the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 will be described. In a normal state (a state in which the front lower drive solenoid 3611 is not energized), the front lower back movable effect unit 3600 has a plunger of the front lower drive solenoid 3611, as shown in FIG. 189(a). The coil spring (not shown) is in a state of being advanced (projected) toward the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the second front decorative body 3603 is arranged behind the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604.

In this normal state, when the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 is driven and the plunger is retracted (moved away from the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction), the slider 3610 connected to the tip of the plunger is also the same as the plunger. It will slide a predetermined amount in the direction. Then, when the slider 3610 slides, the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609, which are inserted into the transmission portion 3610a of the slider 3610, move into the transmission portion 3610a. As a result, the slider 3610 is pushed in the same direction as the sliding direction of the slider 3610, and the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 rotate about the axes of the rotation shafts 3602a, 3603a, and 3604a. Will be done.

By the way, each crank pin 3607a, 3608a, 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 in the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609. Is arranged below the rotary shafts 3602a and 3604a, whereas it is arranged above the rotary shaft 3603a in the second crank member 3608, the slider 3610 is used to arrange the crank pins 3607a and 3608a. , 3609a are moved in the same direction, only the second crank member 3608 is rotated in the opposite direction to the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609.

Then, by the rotation of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609, the undersides connected to the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609, respectively. The front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are each rotated. That is, when the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 is driven to slide the slider 3610, the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 respectively rotate in the same direction, and at the same time, the back lower front first The two decorations 3603 are adapted to rotate in the opposite direction to the front back lower front decoration 3602 and the back lower front third decoration 3604 (see FIG. 189(b)).

It should be noted that when the drive of the under-back front drive solenoid 3611 is released, the plunger of the under-back front drive solenoid 3611 moves in the forward direction by the urging force of a coil spring (not shown), and the slider 3610 also moves to the normal position as the plunger moves. Move and rotate in the opposite direction to the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 via the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609. Then, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 rotate in the opposite direction to the above and return to the normal state.

As a result, the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 can rotate the back lower front first decoration body 3602, the back lower front second decoration body 3603, and the back lower front third decoration body 3604. By sliding the slider 3610 back and forth in the left-right direction by the drive solenoid 3611, the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 causes the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body. The 3604 can be swung freely and attract the player's attention.

In addition, the back lower front first decoration 3602 and the back lower front second decoration 3603 arranged between the back lower front first decoration 3602 and the back lower front third decoration 3604 are the back lower front first decoration 3602 and the back lower front third. Since the decorative body 3604 rotates in the direction opposite to the decorative body 3604, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 360 move largely with respect to the player. Thus, the movement of the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 can be enjoyed.

[2-15. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 194. FIG. 190 is a perspective view showing the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit. Also, FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the back left movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the back left movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 193 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of one movable unit in the back left movable effect unit, and FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back left movable effect unit.

The back left movable effect unit 3700 in this back unit 3000 is arranged on the left side of the opening 3001c of the back box 3000 and in front of the back center movable effect unit 3100. The back left movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the front side of the back center movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3001 on the left side of the opening 3001c and the front of the unit base 3701 in the vertical direction. Three movable units 3710 (back upper left movable unit 3710A, back left middle movable unit 3710B, back lower left movable unit 3710C), and a transparent plate attached to the front side of the movable unit 3710 and attached to the unit base 3701. -Shaped decoration base 3702, a back left decoration board 3703 mounted on the front side of the decoration base 3702 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the back left decoration board 3703 covered with the decoration base 3702 and a rear side opened. The rear left decorative member 3704 having a light-transmitting shallow box shape and the rear left decorative member 3704 and the decorative base 3702 are arranged along the side surface on the right side in front view and irradiate light to the right. A side decoration board 3705 on which a plurality of possible LEDs are mounted.

In the rear left movable effect unit 3700 of this example, the LEDs on the rear left decorative substrate 3703 are caused to emit light, so that the rear left decorative member 3704 can be made to emit light in a planar manner. The back left decoration member 3704 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is arranged on the rear side of the left side area of the center role object 2500 in a front view in the game area 1100, though detailed illustration is omitted. In order to make the corresponding portion of the decoration sticker 1102 attached to the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 brightly emit light by causing the back left decoration member 3704 to emit light in a planar manner. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more visible by making the inside of the game area 1100 appear brighter.

The unit base 3701 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is substantially the same as each of the first shaft portions 3701a and three first shaft portions 3701a that extend forward from the vicinity of the right end in the front view and are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction. It is provided with three second shaft portions 3701b arranged at a height and extending forward from a position slightly to the right of the left end, and three solenoid attachment portions 3701c arranged on the upper right of each second shaft portion 3701b. .. Further, the unit base 3701 is provided with a mounting boss extending forward for mounting the decoration base 3702.

The three movable units 3710 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 are each configured by substantially the same mechanism. The movable unit 3710 includes a back left drive solenoid 3711 that is attached to each of the three solenoid attachment portions 3701c of the unit base 3701 so that the plunger protrudes downward, and a connection portion that connects the tip of the plunger in the back left drive solenoid 3711. 3712a, a rod portion 3712b extending in the left-right direction with the connecting portion 3712a in the middle, and a second shaft portion 3701b of the unit base 3701 formed on the left end side in a front view of the rod portion 3712b. And the shaft hole 3712c, a movable lever 3712 having an elongated hole-like engaging hole 3712d formed at an end portion on the opposite side of the rod portion 3712b and extending in the same direction as the rod portion 3712b, and an engaging hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712. Formed on the right end side of the engaging pin 3713a that is rotatably and slidably inserted therein, the first rod portion 3713b that extends rightward in front view from one end side of the engaging pin 3713a, and the first rod portion 3713b. A rotation hole 3713c into which the first shaft portion 3701a of the unit base 3701 is rotatably inserted, and a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the first rod portion 3713b extends from the rotation hole 3713c are located above the first rod portion 3713b. And an operating lever 3713 having a second rod portion 3713d that extends for a long time.

In the movable lever 3712 of the movable unit 3710, a connecting portion 3712a that is connected to the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711 is formed at a position close to the shaft hole 3712c on the proximal end side as shown in the drawing. The engagement hole 3712d on the front end side and the connecting portion 3712a are formed to be longer (4 to 6 times longer in this example) than the distance to the connecting portion 3712a. As a result, the moving distance of the engagement hole 3712d in the movable lever 3712 is larger than the moving distance of the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711.

Further, the movable unit 3710 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 includes a back left first movable decoration body 3714 rotatably supported by the tip of the second rod portion 3713d of the operation lever 3713 and provided with a three-dimensional decoration on the front side. , Is disposed between the back left first movable decoration body 3714 and the second rod portion 3713d and is rotatably supported at a position approximately in the center of the second rod portion 3713d in the longitudinal direction, and has a three-dimensional decoration on the front side. A back left second movable decorative body 3715 and a back left arranged rearward of the back left second movable decorative body 3715 and attached to the front surface of the second rod portion 3713d and provided with a three-dimensional decoration on the front side. A third movable decoration body 3716; and a back left movable decoration board 3717 mounted on the rear side of the back left third movable decoration body 3716 on the rear side of the second rod portion 3713d and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing.

In this example, the operating lever 3713, the back left first movable decoration body 3714, the back left second movable decoration body 3715, and the back left third movable decoration body 3716 are each formed to have a light-transmitting property. By making the LED of the back left movable decorative substrate 3717 emit light, the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 can be illuminated and decorated. Has become.

Next, the movement of the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described. In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 193(a), has the plungers of the back left drive solenoids 3711 in the three movable units 3710 arranged in the vertical direction project downward, The movable lever 3712 is in a state in which the tip end side (engagement hole 3712d side) is located below the base end side (shaft hole 3712c side). Then, the distal end side (the engaging pin 3713a side) of the first rod portion 3713b of the operating lever 3713 is rotated through the engaging pin 3713a inserted into the engaging hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712 (the engaging pin 3713a side). The second rod portion 3713d extending upward from the rotation hole 3713c is located on the left side in front view of the rotation hole 3713c.

As a result, in a normal state, the second rod portion 3713d of the actuating lever 3713 is located on the left side of the rotation hole 3713c (first shaft portion 3701a), so that the back left side supported by the second rod portion 3713d. The first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are also positioned to the left as a whole. Therefore, in a normal state, most of the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are located on the left side of the right end of the unit base 3701, and the game is played. It is difficult for the person to visually recognize it (see FIG. 194(a) and the like).

When the back left drive solenoid 3711 is driven from this normal state to move the plunger upward, the movable lever 3712 pivots in the counterclockwise direction in front view about the shaft hole 3712c, and the engagement on the tip side is performed. The hole 3712d rises and moves to a position higher than the shaft hole 3712c. Then, when the engaging hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712 rises, the engaging pin 3713a of the actuating lever 3713 inserted in the engaging hole 3712d also rises, and as the engaging pin 3713a rises, the entire operating lever 3713 becomes It turns clockwise when viewed from the front. As a result, the second rod portion 3713d of the actuating lever 3713 moves to a position on the right side of the rotation hole 3713c, and the back left first movable decorative body 3714 and the back left second portion supported by the second rod portion 3713d. The movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 also move to the right side (see FIG. 193(b)).

By driving the back left drive solenoid 3711, the actuating lever 3713 rotates clockwise in a front view to rotate the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body. When 3716 is moved to the right side, most of the back left first movable decoration body 3714, the back left second movable decoration body 3715, and the back left third movable decoration body 3716 are located on the right side of the right end of the unit base. It appears on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and becomes in a state where it can be seen well from the player side (see FIG. 194(b)).

When the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are moved by the rotation of the operation lever 3713, the back left first movable decorative body 3714, Since inertial force acts on the back left second movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716, when the actuating lever 3713 starts to rotate or stops rotating, the inertial force acts on them. The rear left first movable decorative body 3714 and the rear left second movable decorative body 3715 which are supported so that they can swing freely.

Further, when the driving (energization) of the back left drive solenoid 3711 is stopped in the state where the back left first movable decoration body 3714, the back left second movable decoration body 3715, and the back left third movable decoration body 3716 appear, The movable lever 3712 is rotated by gravity so that the tip side (engagement hole 3712d side) moves downward, and the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711 returns to a normal state in which the plunger protrudes downward.

[2-16. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 in which a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 195) are housed, and a lower portion of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the speaker 821 provided in the body frame 3. Has become.

In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-luminance white LED as a backlight.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of main boards 4000 is configured to include a main control board 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls a payout of game balls and the like. A group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. , A main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. .. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. The functions of are also built in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first starting opening sensor 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the first starting opening 2101, and a second starting opening sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second starting opening 2102. The detection signals from the 2127 and the second count sensor 2556 are respectively input through the main control I/O port 4100b, and the magnetics attached to the gate sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3071, the count sensor 2128, and the back unit 3000. A detection signal from the detection sensor 3072 is inputted through the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I/O port 4100b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start port solenoid 2121 and the attacker solenoid are connected via the panel relay board 3012. 2124, and outputs a drive signal to the second attacker solenoid 2561, and controls the main control I/O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3012, the back bottom rear decorative board 33501 of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3500, and the function display board 1191. Through the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol memory display 1184, the second special symbol memory display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol memory display 1188, game A drive signal is output to the status indicator 1183 and the round indicator 1190.

In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 3022, the second starting port sensor 2127, the gate sensor 2402, the count sensor 2128, and the second count sensor 2556. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3071 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2401, so the first starting port sensor 3022, the second starting port sensor 2127, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2402 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3022, the second starting port sensor 2127, and the gate sensor 2402. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 and the second special winning opening 2552 are opened and the game balls are frequently entered, so that the count sensor 2128 and the second count sensor 2556 are used. Gaming balls are also frequently detected. Therefore, the count sensor 2128 and the second count sensor 2556 also use proximity switches having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104 in which the game ball does not enter frequently does not frequently be detected by the general winning opening sensor 3071. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3071 uses a mechanical switch that has a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a sends various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I/O port 4100b. (The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected to each other by a harness (not shown)). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 169). The capacitor BC0 enables the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, as shown in FIG. 195, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of the game balls and the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to the payout and the shooting control by the shooting solenoid 654 and the ball sending solenoid 585 for sending the balls. A firing control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank. 720, the tank rail 731, and the ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 195, the payout control unit 4111, which performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 4110, is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I/O port 4111b as an I/O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is normally operating (hereinafter, referred to as “external WDT 4111c”). ), and a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Are provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and also for preventing fraud. Functions are also built in.

The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various kinds of commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input via the payout control I/O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the out-of-ball switch 750 is input. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted through the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first the payout control input circuit. 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full in the stored game balls is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the board 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with an error LED. A signal for displaying on the display unit 4130 is output to the error LED display unit 4130 via the payout control I/O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is issued for the payout control I/O port 4111b. It is transmitted in a serial manner to the main control board 4100 via, or the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls played by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The error LED display unit 4130 is a segment display unit, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures and the like to indicate the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on a detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotor 748 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball are engaged with each other in the vicinity of the entrance of the payout rotating body 748 to make it difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, Indicates that there is a problem in the counting sensor 751 based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it means that “retry error” (specifically, The fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it means “full tank” (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). That the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR not connected" ( "Electrical connection is cut off in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6", and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically Indicates that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first transmitted via the frequency display board 365, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and this signal is issued to the payout control I/O. The information is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and also outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Firing controller]
As shown in FIG. 195, the firing control unit 4120, which performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches for firing are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a launch timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal. A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. .. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b so that 100 gaming balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

From the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or the finger touches the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and the firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, which electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506, is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main relay terminal. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

The launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d launches a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with launch strength corresponding to the rotary position of the front of the rotary handle body 506, based on the signal from the rotary position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e is triggered by the input of the ball-sending reference pulse to supply a constant current to the ball-sending solenoid 585 through the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By outputting, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 301 of the dish unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current By stopping the output of, the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. .. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing.

[3-3A. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 195, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance. The sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. Transmitting the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to the lamp drive board 3013 or the motor drive board 3015. Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4, and decorations provided on the game board 4. A serial I/O port for a game board decoration drive board, which is composed of a game board light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED of the board To a relay board 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 or the like mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3001 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5. Door-side drive data for outputting and a door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 Side drive emission data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door panel base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen from the liquid crystal control unit serial I/O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is generated as a sound source. It outputs to IC4140c.

Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are obtained by relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects according to various effects are played, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. The speakers 130, 222, 262 and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled so that music and sound effects suitable for various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “WDT with built-in peripheral control”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 also has an external watchdog timer (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). WDT”) is also provided, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control internal WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the peripheral data MPU4140a outputs to the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 and the like mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3001, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body It is performed by a plurality of serial input/output ports different from the drive command and the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

Each of the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 and the like attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. It outputs to the LEDs of the respective decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided on the door frame 5, or the lighting signal or blinks based on the received blinking command on the game board side. The signal is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 2153, 2310, 2311, 2541, 2610, 2611, 3062, 3125, 3305, 3353, 3501, 3525, 3614, 3703, 3705, 3717, etc. provided on the game board 4. To do. Further, each of the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 and the like attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. Output to the dial drive motor 414 provided in the game machine, the respective drive motors 3161, 3181, 3219, 3254, 3307, 3402, 3516, 3556, etc. provided in the game board 4, and the drive solenoids 2330, 2630, 3611, 3711, etc. To do

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 is provided. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are transmitted to the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the back box. The data may be input via the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the 3001.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 and the like mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3001 and the peripheral side relay terminals. The speaker of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the plate 882, or the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 and the like attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. From 821, control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects flow. In the present example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. By transmitting an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal including a lower speaker 391 described later or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the bass speaker 821. , It is possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects).

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 195, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, the VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. A character RAM 4150e to which various stored data is transferred and copied.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is in control. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs a running signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP4150c adopts a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the left-right direction is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a method of outputting.

The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d is large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is large, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit in the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a position where they are arranged on the screen and a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap with each other (hereinafter, referred to as "order of sprite superposition").

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, one character can be used for expression, and in the case of a comparatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six characters arranged in horizontal 2×vertical 3 can be used for expression. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, more characters can be used for expression. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats main scanning for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction from left to right when viewed from the front. The sub-scanning is performed and the sub-scanning is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, one line worth of data is sequentially processed from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the pixels for one line are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4. Game contents]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration relating to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 196 and the like. Note that the functional configuration related to the payout of gaming balls is omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls and effect controls are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. When a detection signal of a game ball is input from the gate sensor 2402 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number which is a lottery result for a normal symbol, and a generated normal random number are predetermined. Normal symbol hold storage means 4202 to temporarily store according to the condition of, and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result based on the normal random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage means 4202, the ROM of the main control board 4100 Normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in, and a normal symbol display control means for varying and displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern 4206, when the ordinary random number (ordinary lottery result) displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1189 by the ordinary symbol display control means 4206 is “ordinary hit”, the starting opening solenoid 2121 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105. The starting opening opening and closing control means 4208, and the normal symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying on the normal symbol storage display 1188 the number of ordinary symbol random numbers reserved and stored in the normal symbol suspension storage means 4202 as the stored number. There is.

The above-mentioned normal symbol reservation storage means 4202 is a normal random number generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2402 as a trigger, while the normal symbol is being displayed by the normal symbol display control means 4206. ) Is stored, and the execution of the stored ordinary random numbers is suspended until the variable display of the ordinary symbols becomes possible.

Further, on the main control board 4100, a predetermined first which is the first special lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022 by the starting winning into the first starting opening 2101. A first special random number generating means 4212 for generating a special random number, and a first special symbol holding storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generating means 4212 according to predetermined conditions, Generated based on the first special lottery result based on the first special random number stored by the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the detection signal detected by the first starting port sensor 3022 by the starting winning to the first starting port 2101. The first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4216 for selecting the first special symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the changed random number from the predetermined special symbol fluctuation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100, and the first special symbol. First special symbol display control means 4218 that variably displays the first special symbol of the first special symbol display 1185 based on the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the symbol variation pattern selection means 4216, and the first special symbol hold It is provided with a first special symbol storage number display control unit 4220 that causes the first special symbol storage display 1184 to display the number of the first special random numbers reserved by the storage unit 4214 as the stored number.

Further, on the main control board 4100, a predetermined second which is the second special lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second starting opening sensor 2127 by the starting winning into the second starting opening 2102. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number, and a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition, Generated based on the second special lottery result based on the second special random number stored in the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 and the detection signal detected by the second starting port sensor 2127 by the starting winning to the second starting port 2102. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4226 for selecting the second special symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the changed random number from the predetermined special symbol fluctuation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100, and the second special symbol. Second special symbol display control means 4228 that variably displays the second special symbol of the second special symbol display device 1186 based on the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the symbol variation pattern selection means 4226, and the second special symbol hold It is provided with a second special symbol storage number display control unit 4230 that causes the second special symbol storage display 1187 to display the number of the second special random numbers stored in the storage unit 4224 as a storage number.

These first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224, the first and second special symbol display control means 4218, 4228 newly and special symbols such as the first and second special symbols are variably displayed. When it is not possible to variably display, the first special random number and the second special random number triggered by the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3022 and the second starting port sensor 2127 are each a predetermined number (for example, four each). ) Is stored, and the execution of the stored first special random number and second special random number is suspended until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible.

In the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the second special random number retained by the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224, start prizes to the starting ports 2101 and 2102. It is provided with a priority holding digestion means 4231 that preferentially executes (digests) the second special random number rather than timing, and the priority holding digestion means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second starting port 2102. The hold of the lottery result is given priority (execution).

Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number (first special lottery result) and the second special random number (second) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224. Advantageous when a special lottery result based on (special lottery result) is a "big hit", a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated, and when a special lottery result is "small hit", a jackpot gaming state is generated Based on instructions from the game state generating means 4232 and the advantageous game state generating means 4232, the opening/closing member 2106 or the second opening/closing member 2553 for closing the special winning opening 2103 or the second special winning opening 2552 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. It is provided with a special winning opening opening/closing control means 4234 for controlling the drive of the attacker solenoid 2124 or the second attacker solenoid 2561. In this example, the special winning opening opening/closing drive control unit 4234 drives the attacker solenoid 2124 when the special lottery result is "big hit", and the second attacker solenoid 2561 when the special lottery result is "small hit". It is designed to drive.

In addition, on the main control board 4100, a first special symbol variation pattern table or a second special symbol variation pattern table according to a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the first special random number or the second special random number. It further comprises a fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the special symbol fluctuation pattern table. The variation pattern table changing means 4236 changes to a variation pattern table according to the game state (for example, a variation pattern table in the low probability non-time saving state or a variation pattern table in the high probability time saving).

Further, the main control board 4100 has a special lottery result based on the first special random number and the second special random number (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), a first special lottery result and a variable random number depending on the random number. Based on one special symbol variation pattern, the second special symbol variation pattern according to the second special lottery result and the variation random number, and the first special symbol memory, the second special symbol memory, etc., predetermined control of the effect command etc. Command generating means 4238 for generating a command for use with, and command transmitting means 4240 for transmitting the command generated by the command generating means 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are transparent. The game is started by being driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the panel 1200. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 1100 will flow down in the game area 1100 on the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. In addition, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the contact of the game balls with the obstacle nails causes the flow of the game balls. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 reaches the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center character 2500 by flowing down from the substantially center in the left-right direction, the peripheral wall part 2503 with the left side lowers the center character 2500. You will be guided to the left area. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters and passes through the gate portion 2401 of the gate member 2400 arranged on the left side of the center character 2500 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402, the detection signal is output. Based on this, in the main control board 4100, the ordinary random number generation means 4200 generates an ordinary random number as the ordinary lottery result. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the ordinary symbol display device 1189 consisting of one LED is alternately emitted in red, green, and orange), A normal symbol based on a normal random number (ordinary lottery result) that is extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) has passed and is stopped (ordinary symbol display device 1189 emits either red or green) .. The variation display of this normal symbol is designed to be performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204.

Specifically, if the drawn random number is a “normal hit” random number, it is stopped and displayed with a normal pattern that suggests a hit (the normal pattern display 1189 emits green light), and the drawn random number is a “normal lost” random number. In the case of, it is designed such that a normal symbol that suggests a loss is displayed (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal pattern suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second starting opening 2102 are opened for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be won in the second starting port 2102.

In addition, the variation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 in the second starting opening 2102 may be changed according to the game state, for example, when the non-time saving state is controlled. The variation time may be changed to a short time or the expansion time may be changed to a long time, as compared with the case where the time is shortened. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern selecting means 4204 selects a normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation pattern table is replaced with a different table for each game state and then easily changed by selecting. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, on the upper side of the center accessory 2500, a region where the game balls can flow down is provided from the center in the left-right direction to the left, but the center to the right is along the outer periphery of the game region 1100. After entering the second game area 2551 arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 through the arc-shaped passage extending downward, the first outlet 2578 is placed on the shelf portion 2601a of the front right movable effect unit 2600. Are discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2100 below the stage 2510 in the game area 1100 by rolling on the shelf 2601a and flow down in the game area 1100. As a result, in a normal game state, when the game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center character 2500 without the opportunity to enter the gate member 2400 or the warp entrance 2504, and the chance is given. As the number decreases, the movement of the game balls becomes less enjoyable.

Therefore, the player appropriately adjusts the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2500, and the player plays the game ball strongly against the dark clouds. It is possible to suppress the game operation such as driving in, and to prevent the game by the original operation of the handle device 500 of the pachinko machine 1 from deteriorating and deteriorating the interest. It should be noted that, without adjusting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 as appropriate, the player can easily hit the game ball into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 simply by operating to strongly hit the second accessory area 2551. When the second special winning opening 2552 in the inside is open, it becomes easier to aim at the second special winning opening 2552, and the game ball is surely received in the second special winning opening 2552 to entertain the player. You can do it.

By the way, in the present example, while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 in a variable manner, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2402, the changing normal symbol is stopped and is normally generated/extracted first. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2402 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol storage holding unit 4202, and its display is displayed. It is designed to be held, and the number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as a held number) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is made up of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of memories. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. It should be noted that when the number of stored data exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2402 is discarded.

In addition, the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 and flows down the left side of the center role object 2500 is brought to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center role object 2500 by the shelf 2301a of the front left movable effect unit 2300. It is like this. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 2104 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3071, the main control board 4100 causes the payout control board 4110 to be detected based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are transferred to the upper plate 301. Is to be paid out to.

It should be noted that the game ball hit into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the big winning opening 2103, and the second big winning opening 2552. In the case, the game area 1100 is provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction and is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 from the outlet 1232 (1151). Further, regardless of which of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the big winning opening 2103, and the second big winning opening 2552, the winning game ball is a game ball. The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side without being returned to the area 1100.

On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504 opening on the left side surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. Then, the game ball supplied onto the stage 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction, is mainly discharged from the guide surface 2511 forward, and is recirculated into the game area 1100.

On the other hand, when the game ball rolling on the stage 2410 enters the chance entrance 2514 which is opened rearward at the substantially center in the left-right direction, the game area 1100 is opened from the chance exit 2515 opened immediately above the first starting opening 2101. It is released into the interior and is highly likely to be received by the first starting port 2101. Then, when the game ball is received by the first starting port 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 3022, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 and the like. Are to be dispensed to the upper plate 301.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103 are arranged side by side in the up-down direction, the game balls emitted from the stage 2510 are: It has a high probability of being accepted into the first starting opening 2101 and the like, and when the second starting opening 2102 and the special winning opening 2103 are acceptable, there is a high possibility that the game ball will be accepted from the stage 2510. Therefore, not only the first starting opening 2101, but also the second starting opening 2102 and the special winning opening 2103 can be made to have a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of the game balls, thereby enhancing the interest.

By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2401 of the gate member 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402 and "normal hit" is selected as a result of the normal lottery, the second starting opening 2102 is closed as described above. When a pair of movable pieces 2105 are opened for a predetermined period of time to be able to win a prize, and when the game ball is received by the second starting port 2102 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2127, the main control is performed. A predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301 via the substrate 4100 and the like.

In addition, in the main control board 4100, when the game balls enter the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102 and are detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022 and the second starting opening sensor 2127, the first starting is performed. The mouth 2101 performs the generation/extraction of the predetermined first special random number by the first special random number generating means 4212, and the second starting mouth 2102 performs the generation/extraction of the predetermined second special random number by the second special random number generating means 4222. Be seen. Then, based on the extracted special random number, after the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display device 1185 or second special symbol display device 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started, it is extracted. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result.

In the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests a "big hit", the attacker unit 2100 will be displayed according to the mode that suggests that "big hit". A big hit game state in which the opening/closing member 2106 or the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened/closed in a predetermined pattern occurs, during which a game ball is won in the big winning opening 2103 or the second big winning opening 2402. As a result, more game balls can be acquired. In addition, when one game ball wins the special winning opening 2103 or the second big winning opening 2402, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301. ..

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests a “small hit” on the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186, the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 has a predetermined pattern. A small hitting game state of opening and closing occurs, and by winning game balls into the large winning opening 2103 during that period, more game balls can be acquired. When one game ball wins the special winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

In addition, also in the first starting port 2101, and the second starting port 2102, similarly to the variable display of the normal symbol due to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 2400, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display. When the special symbol is variably displayed in the device 1186, or when the special symbol cannot be variably displayed, such as during the big hit game state, the game ball wins the starting ports 2101 and 2102 and the first starting port sensor 3022 and the second starting are performed. When detected by the mouth sensor 2127, the first special random number extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting mouth sensor 3022 and the second starting mouth sensor 2127 until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible and The second special random number is stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 so as to hold the display, and the number of the stored special random numbers is set to the first. The special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are displayed.

Each of the first special symbol memory display device 1184 and the second special symbol memory display device 1187 is composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emitting states of the LEDs which are turned off, turned on, and blinked. In this example, up to four of each are stored and displayed. It should be noted that if the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. Further, by the priority holding digestion means 4231, the second special random number stored (held) in the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214. It is designed to be executed (digested). In other words, the holding of the lottery results related to the second starting opening 2102 and the third starting opening 2415 is executed (digested) with priority over the holding of the lottery results related to the first starting opening 2101.

In the main control board 4100, the special random number of the first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3022 and the second starting port sensor 2127 is determined in advance as a jackpot determination table. By comparing with the above, it is determined whether the special random number is a “miss”, a “small hit”, or a “big hit”, and the first start opening sensor 3022 detects the start winning of the start opening 2101. The first symbol random number extracted on the basis of the detected signal and the second symbol random number extracted on the basis of the detection signal detected by the second starting port sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second starting port 2102, and the symbol determination table. By collating, whether the "big hit" is either "10R big hit" or "15R big hit", and also "probable time variation without hit", "probable variation hit time", "time reduction hit", "probability variation time reduction hit", etc. It is being determined.

When the special lottery result based on the first special random number or the second special random number (lottery) extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102 is “small hit” The main control board 4100 closes the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds; about 0.5 seconds in this example). The opening/closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

On the other hand, when the special lottery result based on the extracted first special random number or the second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 causes the advantageous game state generating means 4232 to open/close the member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second attacker. After the second opening/closing member 2553 of the unit 2550 is opened, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds for long-time opening, about 0.5 seconds for short-time opening), or , A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the special winning opening 2103, if any of the conditions of winning is satisfied, the opening and closing pattern to open and close the opening and closing member 2106 (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) , A predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) are repeated, 10 rounds are performed if the "10R big hit" is made, and 15 rounds are made if the "15R big hit" is made, and a big hit game state advantageous to the player is generated. It is like this. After the predetermined number of rounds, for the “big hit”, the big hit judgment table is replaced with one of the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability and the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability according to the gaming state determined by the symbol random number. It is like this.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special random number and the second special random number which are extracted with the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102 and the third starting opening 2415 as an opportunity. According to (in accordance with the special lottery result), in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180, also in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a special random number ( The effect image corresponding to the special lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, each decoration is displayed in a state in which a series of a series of decorative design patterns composed of a plurality of different designs is displayed (for example, three columns of a left decorative design, a middle decorative design, and a right decorative design). The variable display of the design row is started, and after that, it is sequentially stopped and displayed (in this example, the left decorative design → the right decorative design → the middle decorative design is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative design rows are stopped and displayed. Then, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after the plurality of decorative symbol rows are variably displayed is displayed. Since the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. You will pay attention to the decorative pattern.

The variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 is designed to be directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 231). The variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. ing. With this, since the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like control the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900, which is particularly noticeable to the player, a certain one of the lottery results transmitted from the main control board 4100. It is possible to prepare a plurality of variation patterns of symbols for one command in advance and increase the variation patterns of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900.

In addition, in the peripheral control unit 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, based on the command related to the lottery result, the drive motors 3161, 3181, 3219, 3254, 3307, 3402 of the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are provided. 3516, 3556 and drive solenoids 2330, 2630, 3611, 3711 are appropriately operated, and decorative boards 2153, 2310, 2311, 2541, 2610, 2611, 3062, 3125, 3305, 3353, 3501 provided on the game board 4 are also provided. , 3525, 3614, 3703, 3705, 3717 are appropriately made to emit light, so that the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light emission effect.

[5. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 197(a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 197(a), the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment first stores various registers and RAM as the processing of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initializes the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to save information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol The variable random number used in the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the variable display, the reach in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. (The left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the same design, and the middle decorative design is not yet stopped, or the left, middle and right decorative designs are all displayed in sync so that they are the same design. Reach random number used for lottery processing whether or not to do, a symbol random number used for lottery processing to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (first A random number counter for holding random numbers such as a design random number, a second design random number), a random number (ordinary random number) used for a lottery process depending on the winning of the movement trigger of the movable piece 2105, and the like is provided.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even if the first winning opening 2101 is the starting winning prize, the second winning opening 2102 is the starting winning prize. Even in the case, the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach production execution rate can be changed by acquiring the reach random number from a counter that has a different range of random numbers. You may make it different, and the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number, and the second special symbol, which is different from the first reach determination table. By providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only random numbers (fluctuating random numbers) among these random numbers that are not related to winning or losing are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this manner, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

FIG. 197(b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

As shown in FIG. 197(b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2402, the first starting opening sensor 3070, the second starting opening sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, and the general winning opening sensor 3071 are detected. Is entered. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-described random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols and the ordinary symbols is stopped are updated and the random number counter Counter operation is performed.

Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. To execute. Although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the first special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a). Based on the two special symbol process flag), the corresponding process will be selectively executed.

Then, next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning or losing when the movable piece 2105 operates. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is configured such that the movable piece 2105 is driven more frequently within a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state (excluding a part of the 10R big hit game state). The lottery process is executed (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the jackpot gaming state is finished, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the ordinary symbol lottery result is obtained. When the hit occurs, such a time saving state is realized by extending the opening time of the movable piece 2105 and increasing the opening number of the movable piece 2105.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command similarly set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hole management computer as the processing of step S18. ..

Then, next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first starting mouth sensor 3070, the second starting mouth sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, the general winning a prize sensor 3071, etc. as the processing of step S19. When the signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 1186 so that the prize balls corresponding to the signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a mounted on the payout control board 1186 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744, and pays out the prize balls to the player.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes a storage process of checking the increase/decrease in the number of stored memories as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for allowing the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). Becomes

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3070 as shown in FIG. 198. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM first. The first starting opening passage processing such as storing in one special symbol reserved storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2127 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is “15R (right) probability variation jackpot (specific 1)”, “10R” (Right) probability variation big hit (specific 2), "15R (right) rank up probability variation jackpot (specific 3)", the second big winning opening depending on the 15R or 10R jackpot gaming state When 2552 is controlled to the open state and it becomes a mode that suggests "10R (left) probability change big hit (specific 4)", "15R (left) rank up probability change big hit (specific 5)", 15R or long time open The 10R big hit game of short time opening when the above-mentioned special winning opening 2103 is controlled to an open state according to the 10R big hit game state, and it becomes a mode that suggests "10R (left) latent probability variation big hit (specific 6)" Processing for controlling the special winning opening 2103 to the open state is executed according to the state.

On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit execution flag is set. If is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. Incidentally, in the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a mode in which "small hit" is suggested, Processing for controlling the special winning opening 2103 to an open state is executed in accordance with a small hitting game state similar to the 10R big hitting game state of opening for a short time.

If neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set, the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is " On condition that it is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is held. On the condition that the value of the second special pending number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not "0" (step S37), the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped A second special symbol process process including a lottery process is executed (step S39). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 3070 is in the on state and the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2101, as shown in FIG. 199. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S41, if it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps to newly hold the variable display control of the first special symbol, The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S44, the random numbers thus obtained are stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. To store.

However, in the processing of step S41, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S42 to S44, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, the main control MPU4100a, big hit or small hit the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S43. Whether or not, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or a mode type of the game effect to be executed After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as before the variable display according to the start winning is started (step S45), the process is ended.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2127 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the second starting port 2102, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value of the second special pending number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S51, if it is determined that the number of holding of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol to the holding state, the following steps The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S54, each random number thus obtained is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter. To store.

However, in the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of holding the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202(A) and the acquired random numbers, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit by comparing with a variable random number, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, reach effect as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 Or the type type of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202(A), when the first special random number is obtained in step S43 of the first starting opening passage processing, the high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is set. If the high probability big hit judgment value and the first special random number are compared, it is specified whether or not the big hit is generated.If the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value and the first special random number are compared. By comparing with one special random number, it is specified whether or not it becomes a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3819-3918) is the same randomness as the jackpot determination value that is set in the later-described high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 206(A)) and is compared with the first special random number. The jackpot determination value (3909-3918) of a low probability is set as a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 206(A)) at the time of low probability as a jackpot determination value to be compared with the first special random number. It has the same random value. Therefore, in step S61, by comparing the first special random number and the preliminary determination table, it is possible to accurately specify whether or not to be a big jackpot, and the jackpot is "big jackpot 1-12", which is not a big jackpot. It can be classified into either "miss" or "reach 1 to 4."

In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202(A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting opening passage processing, the same random number is set regardless of whether or not the high probability flag is set. By comparing the small hitting determination value set to a numerical value with the first special random number, it is also specified whether or not a small hit is made. The small hit determination value (3800-3818) at the time of high probability or low probability is set in the big hit determination table (see FIG. 206(A)) at the time of high probability or low probability, which will be described later, and the first special random number is set. The random number is the same as the small hit determination value compared with. Therefore, in step S61, by comparing the first special random number and the preliminary determination table, it is accurately identified whether or not a small hit occurs, and is classified into "big hit 12" including the small hit as the preliminary determination information. be able to.

Further, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202(A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second starting opening passage processing, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is displayed. If it is set, it is judged whether or not it will be a big hit by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the second special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value By comparing with the second special random number, it is determined whether or not a big hit. This high probability big hit judgment value (3819-3918) is set in a big hit judgment table (see FIG. 206(A)) at the time of high probability described later and is the same randomness as the big hit judgment value compared with the second special random number. The jackpot determination value (3909-3918) with a low probability is set as a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 206(A)) at the time of a low probability and is compared with the second special random number. The random numbers are the same. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number with the preliminary determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not to be a big jackpot, and the jackpot is "big jackpot 1 to 12", which is not a jackpot. It can be classified into either "miss" or "reach 1 to 4."

Further, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202(A), when it is determined in step S61 that the big special is a big hit by comparing the first special random number with the pre-determination table, a decision value indicating which big hit The type of big hit is specified by comparing with the first symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value (64-175) indicating that the jackpot of the specific 1 is set, the determination value which is set in the later-described symbol determination table (see FIG. 206(C)) and compared with the first symbol random number. Among them, the random number is the same as the determination value indicating that it is the specific 1 big hit, and the determination value (0-63) indicating that the specific 2-5 or the non-specific big hit is the symbol determination table (described later). (See FIG. 206 (C)) is set to a random value that is the same as the determination value indicating that it is a specific 2 to 5 or non-specific jackpot among the determination values that are set and compared with the first symbol random number, and the specific 6 The determination value (176-199) indicating that it is a big hit is set as a later-described symbol determination table (see FIG. 206(C)) and is a particular 6 big hit among the determination values to be compared with the first symbol random number. It is set to the same random number value as the determination value indicating that.

In addition, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202(A), when it is determined that a big hit is to be achieved, a plurality of types of reach effects are obtained by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. Which of the above-mentioned reach effects is to be executed to be a big hit is specified. Specifically, the judgment value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the jackpot of the specific 1 is the same as the judgment value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (5-29) indicating that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree (hereinafter, also referred to as weak SP reach) is executed is among the determination values compared with the variable random number. It is a random number that is the same as the judgment value that indicates that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, and a specific super-reach effect among the super-reach effects with a high jackpot expectation (hereinafter also referred to as strong SP reach) The determination value (30-216) indicating that a process other than (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is executed is a super-reach with a high jackpot expectation that is other than the specific super-reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. A determination value (217-240), which is the same random number value as the determination value indicating that the effect is executed, and indicates that a specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation degree is a variable random number. Among the judgment values to be compared, the same random number value is used as the judgment value indicating execution of a specific super reach effect.

In addition, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the specific 2 to 5 or the non-specific jackpot is the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values that are compared with the variable random numbers. The judgment value (5-29), which has the same random number value as the above and indicates that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is to be executed, is a judgment value (5-29) that is compared with the variable random number, and the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is low. The determination value (30-216), which is the same random number value as the determination value indicating that it is to be executed, indicates that a particular super-reach effect other than the specific super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is to be executed. Among the judgment values, the random number is the same as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super-reach effect is executed. The determination value (217-240) indicating execution of the super-reach effect is the same random number value as the determination value indicating execution of a specific super-reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random number. ..

Further, in the jackpot of the specific 6, the judgment value (0-89) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is the same random number value as the judgment value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (90-189) indicating that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is executed indicates that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The judgment value (190-216), which is the same random number value as the judgment value and indicates that a part other than the specific super reach effect among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation is executed, The random number is the same as the judgment value that indicates the execution of a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super-reach effect. The determination value (217-240) indicating that the action is performed is the same random number value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the determination values that are compared with the variable random number.

Therefore, by comparing the first symbol random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, and by comparing the variable random number and the pre-determination table, the type of jackpot is accurately specified, and as the pre-determination information, from the normal reach. "Big hit 1" which is a special big hit of "1", "Big hit 2" which is a special big hit from weak SP reach, "Big hit 3" which is a special big hit from strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach "Big hit 4" which is a big hit of a specific 1 from a specific strong SP reach, "Specific big 2-5" from a normal reach or "big hit 5" which includes a non-specific big hit, Specific 2-5 from a weak SP reach or non- "Big hit 6" that includes a specific big hit, specific 2-5 from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach, or "big hit 7" that includes a non-specific big hit, a specific 2 from a specific strong SP reach "Big hit 8" that includes 5 or unspecified big hits, "Big hit 9" which is a big hit of 6 specified from normal reach, "Big hit 10" which is a big hit of 6 specified from weak SP reach, other than specific strong SP reach It is possible to classify it as either a "big hit 11" which is a big jackpot of 6 from the strong SP reach or a "12 big jackpot" which is a big jack of 6 from the strong SP reach.

Further, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202(A), when it is specified in step S61 that the big special is to be achieved by comparing the second special random number with the pre-determination table, a determination value indicating which big hit The type of big hit is specified by comparing with the second random number. Specifically, the determination value (64-199) indicating that the jackpot of the specific 1 is set, the determination value which is set in the later-described symbol determination table (see FIG. 206(C)) and compared with the second symbol random number. Among them, the random number is the same as the determination value indicating that it is the specific 1 big hit, and the determination value (0-63) indicating that the specific 2-5 or the non-specific big hit is the symbol determination table (described later). (See FIG. 206(C)) and is set to the same random number as the determination value indicating that it is a specific 2 to 5 or non-specific jackpot among the determination values to be compared with the second symbol random number. Further, when comparing the second symbol random number and the preliminary determination table in step S61, similarly to the case of comparing the first symbol random number and the preliminary determination table described above, a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed. And a variable random number are compared with each other to identify which of the plurality of types of reach effects is to be executed and which is a big hit. Therefore, by comparing the second symbol random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, and by comparing the variable random number and the pre-determination table, the type of jackpot is accurately specified, and as the pre-determination information, "big hit" It can be classified into any of "1" to "big hit 12".

In addition, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202(A), when it is determined that the high probability state is lost, the reach is displayed when the high probability flag indicating that the high probability state control is executed is set. By comparing the reach judgment value at the time of probability change and the reach random number, it is specified whether the reach is displayed or not, and the time saving flag indicating that the control of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is being executed is displayed. If it is set, whether or not to display the reach is specified by comparing the reach judgment value indicating that the reach is displayed and the reach random number, and whether the high probability flag or the time saving flag is set. Instead, when it is indicated that the control in the normal state is being executed, the reach determination value at the time of indicating that the reach is displayed is compared with the reach random number to specify whether or not the reach is displayed. The reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change is set to a reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. 206(B)) described later to be the same random number value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-5) at the time is set to a reach determination table for time saving (see FIG. 206(B)) described later and is set to the same random number value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-6) at the time is the same random number value as the reach determination value set in the reach determination table at normal time (see FIG. 206B) described later and compared with the reach random number. .. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number with the pre-determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not the reach production is to be executed as the game production executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the jackpot is not a big hit, and the pre-determination is performed. The information can be classified into either "miss" that does not display the reach (execute the reach effect) or "reach 1 to 4" that displays the reach (execute the reach effect).

In addition, the reach determination value (0-5) at the time reduction and the reach determination value (0-6) at the normal time include the same determination value (0) as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, whether to display the reach (execute the reach effect) in any of the probable change time, the time saving time, and the normal time is classified. Therefore, in step S61, by comparing the reach random number with the pre-determination table, it is possible to identify which of the gaming states of the probability change time, the time saving time, and the normal time to execute the reach effect as the game effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900. can do.

Further, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202(A), when the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed is compared with the variable random number. By doing so, the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified. Specifically, the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is set in a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, of the determination values to be compared with the variable random number. The determination value (164-222), which is the same random number value as the determination value indicating that the maximum reach expectation degree is to be executed, is a variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown). ) And the random number that is the same as the judgment value indicating that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed among the judgment values to be compared with the variable random numbers, and is specified among the super-reach effects with a high jackpot expectation. The determination value (223-235) indicating that a process other than the super reach effect is executed is set in a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described below and is compared with a variation random number. A random number that is the same as the judgment value that indicates that a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the effect is executed, and a determination that a specific super-reach effect is to be executed among the super-reach effects with a high jackpot expectation The value (236-240) is the same as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the determination values set in a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and compared with the variation random number. It is a random number. Therefore, in step S61, the variation random number is compared with the pre-determination table to accurately specify the mode type of the game effect to be executed, and the "reach 1" for executing the normal reach effect as the pre-determination information, the jackpot expectation level. "Reach 2" that executes low super reach production, "Reach 3" that executes super reach production with high expectation of big hits (other than specific super reach production), Super reach production with high expectation of big hit (specific super reach production ) Can be classified as one of “reach 4”. Then, by comparing the reach random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the advance determination information can be classified into any one of "reach 1" to "reach 4".

As described above, as a result of comparison between the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202(A) and the acquired random numbers (special random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number), whether or not a big hit or a small hit is a big hit. If it becomes a big hit type, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or pre-determination information such as a mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified. As shown in FIG. 202(B), the pre-determination information is classified into any of 17 types of “miss”, “big hit 1” to “big hit 12”, and “reach 1” to “reach 4”.

Then, in the production pre-determination process (steps S45, S55), the specified pre-determination information (whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, a kind of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the type of the game effect to be executed) and the acquired special random number type (either the first special random number or the second special random number). , And sets the hold number command corresponding to the hold number (value of the hold number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. For example, in the production pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-judgment information, that the first special random number is acquired, and the number of first special symbols reserved (Value of the first special hold number counter), and set the first special symbol hold number command according to (step S62). Incidentally, in the fourth digit of the hold number command (for example, 620XH when the preliminary determination information regarding the first special symbol is “miss”), X=2 when the hold number=1, and the hold number=2. Sometimes X=3, when the number of reservations=3, X=4, and when the number of reservations=4, X=5. For this reason, the main control board 4100 sends a hold number command to the peripheral control board 4010, so that the start opening (one of the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102) at which the start winning is generated, the start. In addition to the number of holdings stored corresponding to the mouth, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is to be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the kind of big hit, a big hit or If the small hit does not occur, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the preliminary determination information such as the type classification of the game effect to be executed is started to be displayed in a variable manner according to the start winning. The peripheral control MPU 4140a previously mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 can be grasped.

In this example, the same random number as the big hit determination value in the pre-determination table and the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, which will be described later, is used, but the random number is not limited to this. For example, one that includes only a part of the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table as the big hit judgment value of the advance judgment table, or a part or all of the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table and the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table are different from each other. The number of random numbers may be included, and the degree of possibility of a big hit may be determined in the effect preliminary determination process.

Specifically, a part of the big hit judgment value and the deviation judgment value (which may include the small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value can be respectively distinguished as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group The ratio of the jackpot determination value that can be determined as the above to the outlier determination value is set to be higher than the proportion of the jackpot determination table that determines the winning probability of the jackpot. Among the random numbers acquired by the means, the winning random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) are classified and classified into either of the above-mentioned deviation judgment value and the above-mentioned big hit judgment value. While maintaining the state of, the judgment of whether the winning random number used for the judgment is a value belonging to the above high-probability random number group in which the big hit judgment value and the outlier judgment value are mixed, the suspended state Equipped with a pseudo-probability leading determination means capable of executing a leading determination about the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) associated with winning a big jackpot for each determination process, The degree of expectation may be determined in advance.

By providing a high-probability random number determination means in which the jackpot judgment value and the out-of-match judgment value are mixed in this way, there is a risk that confidential information about the result of the jackpot judgment still pending may be leaked. While maintaining the conventional production structure excluding the, the expectation degree (pseudo winning probability) of the big hit according to the mixture ratio of the big hit judgment value and the outlier judgment value in the high probability random number determination means is The preceding judgment can be executed. For example, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), the preceding determination that the winning random number provided for the jackpot determination is a value belonging to the high-probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. When, the expectation for the big hit when the judgment process based on the random number value (the value belonging to the low-probability random number group paired with the high-probability random number group) which is not the preceding special judgment value is judged It is decided that the degree (pseudo winning probability) is lower than the above expected jackpot (probability of winning) (pseudo-lowered winning probability).

According to the preceding determination method for such a high-probability random number group, although the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (held state) at the time when a particular determination process is suspended. As for the expected degree (pseudo winning probability), it is possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of newly outputting the hold display or at the time of shift display according to the hold exhaustion. Will be done.

FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and a random number used for determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, depending on the first special symbol process flag described above, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special random number selection process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Pattern normal processing (step S80)
2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81). )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83)
5. As the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 197).

FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 204, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) is read from the same RAM. .. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserve number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserve storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each storage area. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). become.

Then, after that, as a process of step S105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, when the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S111), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 206(A). Select the big hit determination table (step S112), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S111), select the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 206 (A) (step S113), select The big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 206(A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and when the game state is at a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)) The low-probability big-hit determination table used at the time of, and the high-probability big-hit determination table used when the game state is high-probability time (high-probability non-time saving state, high-probability time saving state). Then, in the low-probability big-hit determination table, similar to the pre-determination table, 10 kinds of first special random numbers coincide with the big-hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and 19 kinds of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the small hit determination value indicating that the winning has been won, and the 3890 types of first special random numbers match the deviation determination value that indicates the above deviation. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit determination value is set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and there is no chance to win the small hit. In the low-probability jackpot determination table, like the pre-determination table, 10 types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot was won, and 3909 types of the second special random numbers are out of the above range. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that

Further, in the high probability big hit determination table, 100 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table, as in the case of the pre-determination table. Matches the big hit judgment value, the 19 kinds of first special random numbers match the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the 3800 kinds of first special random numbers match the deviation judgment value. One special random number is associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state), when the big-hit judgment value indicating that the jackpot is won is low probability (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state) ) And the time saving state (low probability time saving state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, a small hit determination value is set in the big probability determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and there is no chance to win the small hit. In this high probability big hit determination table, 100 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table, as in the above-described preliminary determination table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and to coincide with the deviation determination value indicating that the 3909 types of the second special random numbers are the deviation.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that it is a big hit as a result of the comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S115). ), sets the big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit and ends the process (step S116), and selects the big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process first special read in step S102. As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set, and the process is ended (step S118). As a result of the comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, when it is determined that there is no reach, the reach determination table shown in FIG. 206(B) and step S102. It is compared with the reach random number read in (step S119).

The reach determination table shown in FIG. 206(B) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a and is used when the gaming state is a certain change (high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state)). Reach judgment table for time, Reach judgment table for short time used when the game state is short (low probability time saving state), Reach judgment for normal time used when the game state is normal (normal state) And a table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the 238 determination value indicating that the reach random number does not reach, as in the case of the advance determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with.

Further, in the reach determination table for time saving, as in the case of the advance determination table, the reach determination indicating that the six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability variation reach are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value and the reach determination value indicating that the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is increased in the short time (low probability short time state) as compared with the probability change time (high probability state).

Furthermore, in the normal reach determination table, like the pre-determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random numbers as the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table for the probability variation time and the shortened time can be reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and the reach determination value indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal time (normal state), the reach determination value indicating that the reach is performed is higher than the probability change time (high probability state) and the short time (low probability time short state).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), and if it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S120a), the fluctuation is detected. Is set to reach, and the process ends (step S120b).

FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery process result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 206(C). (Step S122), the type of big hit is determined, and the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S123).

As shown in FIG. 206(C), in the symbol determination table, like the above-described preliminary determination table, for each determination result (specification 15R (right) probability variation big hit, specification 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, specification 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, specific 6 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit, non-specific 10R (left) (Normal big hit)) is stored in the form of being associated with a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the jackpot type is determined by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
1. After the 15R jackpot gaming state is controlled, the 15R jackpot gaming state using the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is controlled (the opening/closing pattern for opening/closing the second opening/closing member 2553 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds)). Specified 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit to control to the high probability time saving state until it becomes a big hit again. After controlling the 10R jackpot gaming state using the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 (the opening/closing pattern for opening/closing the second opening/closing member 2553 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)), the 10R jackpot gaming state is completed. Specified 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit to control to the high probability time saving state until it becomes a big hit again. The big hit game state is controlled as if it ends in the 10R big hit game state using the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550, but after that, the big hit game state is continued and the total 15R big hit game state is obtained. 3. 15R (right) rank-up probability variation jackpot that controls (rank up) so that after the 15R jackpot gaming state, the high probability time saving state is controlled until it becomes a jackpot again. Control the 10R jackpot gaming state using the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 (the opening/closing pattern for opening/closing the opening/closing member 2106 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)), and after the 10R jackpot gaming state is over, the jackpot is again played. Specified 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit to control to high probability time saving state 5. The jackpot gaming state is controlled as if it ends in the 10R jackpot gaming state using the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, but the jackpot gaming state is continued after that so that the total 15R jackpot gaming state is controlled. (Rank up), and after the 15R big hit game state is over, until the big hit is reached again, the high probability time saving state is controlled to 15R (left) rank up certain probability big hit 6. Controlling the 10R big hit game state using the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in a mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and controlling to the high probability non-time saving state until the big hit occurs again after the end of the 10R big hit game state. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, a specific 6R (left) latent probability variation big hit for executing a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not it is in a high probability state 7. Control the 10R big hit game state using the opening and closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, and after the end of the 10R big hit game state, a special display (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed a predetermined number of times (50 times). It is determined to be one of the seven types of jackpots, which is a non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot that is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state until it is executed.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different as compared with the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is made different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 206(C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, 15R (right) probability variation big hit of specific 1, 10R (right) probability variation big hit of specific 2, and specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 6 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit, non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit distribution is set On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, 15R (right) probability variation big hit of specific 1, 10R (left) probability variation big hit of specific 4, 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, non-specific The distribution of judgment values is set for a specific 10R (left) normal jackpot.

Further, in the present example, when the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, and the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, the second attacker unit 2550's first hit. While controlling the big hit game state to open and close two opening and closing member 2553, 10R (left) probability change big hit of specific 4, 15R (left) rank up probability change big hit of specific 5, 10R (left) latent probability change of specific 6 When the big hit, non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, the big hit game state is controlled so as to open and close the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100. Therefore, during the control of the big hit game state in which the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened/closed, the center role object 2500 is set so that many game balls are won in the second big winning opening 2552. You have to shoot a game ball aiming at the right side of the game (so-called "right hit"). On the other hand, during control of the big hit game state of opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, aiming at the left side of the center role object 2500 so that a lot of game balls will be won at the big winning hole 2103. Must be fired (so-called "left-handed").

As described above, while the big hit game state in which the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened/closed is controlled, a game ball is shot at the left side of the center role object 2500. In the game area 1100 on the left side of, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls are brought into contact with the obstacle nails to form a game ball. Various movements are added and it is designed to flow down. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, even if a player hits a game ball on the left side of the center role object 2500 with the aim of the special winning opening 2103, it does not mean that the player will win the big winning opening 2103. Without being limited to this, the game balls that have not won the big winning opening 2103 are discharged to the outside from the out opening 1232 (1151) provided in the lower left and right center of the game area 1100.

On the other hand, while the big hit game state in which the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened/closed is controlled, a game ball is shot at the right side of the center accessory 2500, but the center accessory is No obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in the second game area 2551 on the right side of 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened, a game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second special winning opening 2552. The second big winning opening 2552 is always won. Therefore, in the big hit game state in which the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened/closed, the game ball hit in the second game area 2551 is wasted (is discharged to the outside from the outlet 1232 (1151). ), compared to the big winning hole 2103 in the big hit game state of opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, the game ball comes to efficiently win the second big winning hole 2552, and the short time The big hit game state can be digested with.

Further, in the present example, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round in the big hit game state in the specific 1 to 5 and the non-specific and the specific 6 (the time to open and close the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100) or The opening time of the second special winning opening 2552 (the time for controlling the opening of the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550) is different. Specifically, in the case of specific 1 to 5 and non-specific big hits, a long open state in which the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 or the second special winning opening 2552 per round is 30 seconds is set. On the other hand, when the specific 6R 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit is controlled, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round is set to 0.05 seconds which is extremely shorter than the long opening state. Controlled to a short open state. Even when a small hit occurs, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round in the small hit game state is controlled to a short open state of 0.05 seconds. In this way, when the specific 6R (left) latent probability variation big hit or small hit occurs, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round is too short, so that the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened. Even if the opening control is recognized, it is difficult to win the game ball into the special winning opening 2103. That is, during the control of the short open state in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the game ball hardly wins in the big winning opening 2103, and unlike the control in the long open state, a lot of game balls. Can not be expected to win.

Further, in this example, a plurality of types of effect modes corresponding to the game state are prepared, and when the game state is switched by the big hit (including the case where the game state is not switched by the small hit). The production mode is also changed. In this effect mode, a game effect (reach effect, effect during big hit game, etc.) dedicated to each effect mode is set, and when the effect mode shifts, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a liquid crystal display corresponding to each effect mode. The effect color is displayed by the background color of the device 1900 and the character (including the aspect of the decorative pattern), and the impression of the game is changed in each effect mode. Specifically, when the low probability non-time saving state (normal state) is controlled, the normal time mode (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to a blue background color) is set, and the high probability time saving state (probability change) is set. State), the probability changing middle mode (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to a red background color) is set, and the low probability middle time mode is controlled when it is controlled to a low probability time saving state (time saving state). (In this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to have a yellow background color), and the probability variation latent mode (when the probability probability non-time saving state (probability change state) or the low probability non-time saving state (normal state) is controlled) In this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to a light blue background color). In this way, the player can visually recognize the background color of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to determine which of the effect modes is controlled. It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a predetermined mode (a character or the like may be used, or a character or the like corresponding to each effect mode) so that the player can determine which effect mode is being controlled. May be displayed.

Then, in the normal mode corresponding to the low-probability non-time saving state, the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, the specification 4 When it becomes 10R (left) probability variation big hit, it shifts from the normal time mode to the probability variation middle mode along with controlling to the high-probability time saving state after the big hit game state, and the non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit In the case of, when the big hit game state is over, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the time saving mode with the control to the low probability time saving state, and it becomes a specific 6R (left) latent probability variation big hit or small hit. In the case of, when the big hit game state is over, the high probability non-time saving state is controlled, or after the small hit game state is ended, the low probability non-time saving state is controlled. ing. Also, in the probability variation middle mode according to the high probability time saving state, if the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the specification 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, the specification 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit. After the jackpot gaming state is over, the probability variation mode is continued with the control to the high-probability time-saving state again, and in the case of a non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot, it is lowered after the jackpot gaming state. The probability changing mode is changed to the time saving mode during the control to the probability time saving state.

In the above probability variation middle mode, if the specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, the specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, until the start of the big hit game state It is difficult to determine whether or not to control to a high probability time saving state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit game state, and the big hit game state using the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is started. As a game effect in the big hit game state that is executed by the end of the game state, a probability variation bonus effect of whether to control to a high-probability time saving state is executed after the end of the big hit game state. In the probability variation bonus effect, for example, the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 to cause the hero character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to succeed in deciding the bad character multiple times (four times. ), the protagonist character judges the bad guy character until a plurality of effects are executed in the case of a specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit and a specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit. By succeeding in that, while controlling to a high-probability time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, in the case of a non-specific 10R (left) regular jackpot, the protagonist character is a bad guy in all of the multiple productions. By failing to judge the character, it is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. As described above, in the probability variation bonus effect, since the effect of whether or not the protagonist character succeeds in judging the bad character is executed a plurality of times (four times), the protagonist character has an opportunity to succeed in judging the bad character. It is possible to increase the expectation that it will be controlled to the high-probability time saving state after the jackpot gaming state is finished.

Further, in the normal mode described above, if the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit and the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, 10R big hit game state or 15R big hit by the start of the big hit game state It is difficult to determine which of the game states is controlled, and the big hit game state using the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is started, but is executed by the time the 10R big hit game state ends. As a game effect during the big hit game state, a rank-up effect of whether to continuously control to the 15R big hit game state after the end of the 10R big hit game state is executed. In this rank-up effect, for example, an effect of whether or not the object detection unit 2530 detects the movement of the player's hand and succeeds in destroying a predetermined number of enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. If it is executed and the specific 3R 15R (right) rank up probability variation jackpot is successful, the jackpot gaming state is continuously controlled up to the 15R jackpot gaming state by succeeding in destroying a predetermined number of enemy characters. In the case of the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, the big hit game state is controlled to end in the 10R big hit game state by failing to destroy a predetermined number of enemy characters.

Further, in the normal mode described above, in the case of the specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit and the non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, after the end of the 10R big hit game state by the start of the 10R big hit game state It is difficult to determine whether to control to a high probability time saving state (probability change state), and the 10R big hit game state using the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is started, but until the 10R big hit game state ends. As a game effect during the big hit game state executed in step S10, a probability variation challenge effect of whether to control to the high-probability time-saving state is executed after the end of the 10R big hit game state. In this probability variation challenge effect, for example, the effect of whether or not the door can be successfully opened by rotating the dial operation unit 401 according to the instruction displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed, and 10R of the specific 4 is executed. (Left) If it is a probability variation big hit, by controlling the high probability time saving state after the end of the 10R big hit game state by succeeding in opening the door, in the case of an unspecified 10R (left) normal big hit In the case of failing to open the door, it is controlled to a low-probability time saving state after the 10R big hit game state ends.

Further, in the normal mode described above, when the specific 6 10R (left) latent probability variation jackpot is reached, it is controlled to a high-probability non-time saving state until it becomes a jackpot again after the 10R jackpot gaming state ends. Also, in the case of a small hit, since the game state at the time of a small hit is continuously controlled after the end of the small hit game state, a small hit occurs when it is controlled to a low probability non-time saving state. When it becomes, it will be controlled to a low probability non-time saving state after the end of the small hitting game state set to be equivalent to the 10R big hitting game state. In this way, when the specific 6R 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit or small hit is reached, either after the 10R big hit game state is ended or after the small hit game state is ended, both are controlled to the non-time saving state. However, as the effect mode executed after the end of the 10R big hit game state or after the end of the small hit game state, the probability variation latent mode in which it is difficult to determine whether or not it is the high probability state is executed. Further, in the probability variation latency mode, two types of effect modes, probability variation latency A mode and probability variation latency B mode are set, and when the probability variation latency A mode is entered, it is higher than when it is entered. It is set so that the probability of being a probability state is high. That is, when the probability 6 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit of the specific 6 is controlled when the probability is low, the probability variation latency A mode and the probability variation latency B mode of the specific probability 10R (left) latency probability variation jackpot are smaller than those of the small hit. Of these, the probability of deciding on the probability variation latent A mode is increased.

In the probability variation latent A mode described above, for example, the object detection unit 2530 detects movement of the player's hand to dismiss the enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 one after another, thereby increasing the rank, and the ally character. Perform a production of whether to succeed in rescue, and when it is a big hit, by succeeding in rescuing the teammate's character, control the big hit game state according to the type of big hit On the other hand, when the player character is out of control, the enemy character is controlled only one after another, or the rescue of the teammate character fails. In the probability variation latent B mode described above, for example, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect of whether or not the ally character succeeds in capturing the enemy character is executed. Succeeds in capturing the enemy character to control the big hit game state according to the type of big hit, whereas when it is out, the ally character cannot find the enemy character, Alternatively, even if an ally character discovers an enemy character, it is controlled so as to fail to be captured.

Further, when the type of big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of big hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be the 1R 15R (right) probability variation jackpot, the 15R (right) probability variation jackpot design of the first special symbol is determined, and when the 10R (right) probability variation jackpot is specified 2 Is determined to the first special symbol 10R (right) probability variation big hit symbol, and if it is determined to be the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation jackpot, it is determined to be the first special symbol 15R (right) rank up probability variation jackpot design However, if it is decided to 10R (left) probability variation big hit of specific 4, it is decided to 10R (left) probability variation jackpot design of the first special symbol, and if it is decided to 10R (left) latent probability variation jackpot of particular 6 One special symbol 10R (left) latent probability variation jackpot design is determined, and if unspecified 10R (left) normal jackpot is determined, the first special symbol 15R normal jackpot symbol is determined. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124), and if the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. If the small hit flag is not set, it is determined to be a deviating symbol as the mode when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S126).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as a process of step S127, these lottery results (a type of big hit, a small hit, a loss of reach, an instruction of either the loss (stop symbol of the first special symbol) Of the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, after that, as the process of step S128, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing (stop pattern), a specific 1R of the jackpot 15R (right) probability change from the received determination result notification command. When the big hit is specified, 15R (right) probability variation big hit design (combination of the same decorative design of "gold") is determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game production) The determined stop design is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the same decorative symbols of “gold” as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, it is a 15R (right) probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It is possible to determine that the 15R jackpot gaming state has been confirmed to be acquired using the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 that has the largest number of rounds and that allows the game balls to be won into the big winning opening 2103 easily.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies 10R (right) probability variable jackpot of the specific 2 out of the jackpots from the received determination result notification command, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. If it is done, it is decided to be 10R (right) probability variation big hit symbol (combination of an odd number of identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7"), and 15R of the specific 3 jackpot (right) ) 15R (right) when the rank-up probability variation big hit is specified. Rank-up probability variation big hit pattern (combination of odd and same decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7". 10R (right)). It is determined to be the same as the probability variation big hit symbol), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of odd numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7" as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 has stopped fluctuating, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol It is not possible to distinguish between the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit and the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, but the 15R big hit game state or 10R big hit using the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 It is possible to determine to control to the high probability state after the end of the gaming state.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies 10R (left) probability variable jackpot of 4 out of the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped (stop symbol). In the case of 10R (left) probability change jackpot design (a combination of the same even number of decorative symbols "2", "4", "6") decided, 15R of the jackpot (left) rank up probability change When the big hit is specified, 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit design (combination of the same even decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6". 10R (left) common with the probability variation big hit design) However, if a non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot is specified among the jackpots, a 10R (left) regular jackpot pattern (a combination of even and identical decorative symbols of "2", "4", and "6". (Left) Same as the probability variation big hit symbol), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the same even number of decorative symbols “2”, “4”, and “6” as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 has stopped fluctuating, the specific symbol from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to the specific symbol 4 It is not possible to discriminate between 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, and non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, and the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550. Until the effect result in the 10R big hit game state (or the 15R big hit game state) is derived, it is impossible to determine whether or not to control to the high probability state after the end of these big hit game states.

Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped (stop symbol), the specific 6R of 10R (left) latent confirmation probability jackpot from the jackpot from the received determination result notification command. If specified, 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit design (combination of predetermined decorative designs among outlying designs (separation). Specifically, combination of decorative design of "357") is determined, and small When the hit is specified, it is determined to be a small hit design (a combination of predetermined decorative designs among the outlying designs (separation). 10R (left) latent probability variation large common with the big hit design) and is identified from the variation pattern command. When the variable time that elapses (the end of the game effect) has elapsed, the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the decorative designs of "357" as the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, either the specific 6R 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit or the small hit from the stop design of the decorative design. It is not possible to determine whether or not it is, and the liquid crystal is displayed after the 10R big hit game state (the 10R big hit game state in which the game ball is difficult to enter) using the second opening/closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550. Since it is difficult to determine whether the display device 1400 is in the high-probability state or not, it is impossible to determine whether or not to control the high-probability state after the end of these jackpot game states.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing (stop pattern), when the reach failure is specified from the received determination result notification command, the failure pattern accompanied by the reach. (A combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the decorative patterns on the left and right are the same.) If you determine the deviation, the deviation pattern that does not involve reach (the combination of the decoration patterns that are not the same. However, the decoration patterns on the left and right. Are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. 208. If it is (step S141), the type of big hit determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the current game state are selected (step S142), if the small hit flag is set (step S143), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hits according to the current game state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. If (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current game state is selected (step S146), and if the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are not set, That is, in the case of a normal deviation (a deviation without executing the reach effect), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of deviation is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the variation pattern table is started around The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display device 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation patterns set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU4100a, the variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, and by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, similarly to the pre-determination table, the aspect type of the reach effect executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. Is set to decide. Specifically, 164 types of variable random numbers coincide with the determination value (0-163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectation. And a determination value (223-240) indicating that one of the 18 types of variable random numbers executes any of the super reach effects with a high jackpot expectation. As described above, the above-mentioned variable random numbers are associated with each other. The super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super-reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S151, it is determined whether or not the count value of the time saving counter is set to "0". To do. Then, if the counter value is not "0", after the time saving counter is counted down (step S152), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short time counter is "0" (step S153). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control in the time saving state is ended is set (step S154).

If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the count value of the hour/hour counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the hour/hour counter is not “0”, the At this point, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process is ended.

FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 209, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S171. As the process, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process ends.

FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 211, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S181 As the process, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). As a result, the control in the low-probability time saving state is terminated and the control in the low-probability non-time saving state (normal state) is started.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game state is started (step S187), and the jackpot game is played. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying that the big hit game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit game state is being executed is set and the time saving flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When the process is updated so that the process is transferred (step S190), this process ends. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and is a type of jackpot (15R (right) high probability time/short, 10R (right) high probability time/short, 15R(right) rank up high probability time/short. Per 10R (left) high probability hour/hour, 15R (left) rank up high probability hour/hour, 10R (left) high probability non-hour/hour, 10R (left) low probability hour/hour) .. In step S187, types of big hits (15R (right) high-probability time-savings, 10R (right) high-probability time-savings, 15R (right) rank up high-probability time-savings, 10R (left) high-probability time-savings, 15R (left)) Rank up High probability Big hit start command (15R (right) high probability time-saving per start command, 10R (right) high probability per 10R (left) high probability non-time-saving per 10R (left) low probability time-short hit) Time reduction per hour start command, 15R (right) Rank up high probability time reduction per hour start command, 10R (left) High probability time reduction per hour start command, 15R (left) Rank up high probability time reduction per hour start command, 10R (left) High probability non-time reduction Set the hit start command, 10R (left) low probability time reduction hit start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit game state according to the kind of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamps/LEDs and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game state is started (step S192). The standby time until the start of the small hitting game state (the time for displaying that the small hitting game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S194), and the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag. When it is updated to (step S190), this processing ends. The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and in step S195, by setting the small hit start command, the effect of the small hit game state instructed by the small hit start command is the liquid crystal. It is executed by the display device 1900, lamps/LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like.

[6. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 211, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs initial setting processing (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (incrementing the 16 ms progress monitoring counter by 1) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady processing, processing for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps/LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") in step S502, the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, in the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) The control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speakers 130, 222, 262 is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp/LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to the lamp drive substrate 3013 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating a random number (for example, a read-ahead random number) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, immediately after the 16 ms steady process has started 16 ms, the 16 ms steady process starts from the beginning (command of step S601). Do not execute (from parsing process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is executed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process.

[7. Melody reach]
Next, the winning type notification executed during the variable display will be described. In this example, the gaming state (production mode) after the jackpot gaming state executed based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variation display being executed is output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. during the variation display. It is designed to be suggested by the voice mode. The details will be described below.

As described above, during the high-probability time saving state, the transition control is performed to the probability changing mode. Then, when the probability control mode is controlled, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the background color of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to red and continuously outputs the predetermined special sound mode. Therefore, the player can know that the high probability time saving state is controlled by determining whether the special voice mode is output.

In this example, a variation pattern for executing "melody reach" (for example, "melody reach" is a certainty variation big hit "Melody reach certainty variation big hit", and "melody reach" is executed is a latent certain variation jackpot. Receiving latent probability variation jackpot", "melody reach" is a normal jackpot, "melody reach normal jackpot", "melody reach" is a missed "melody reach miss" etc.) As a voice mode that is output during variable display, a voice mode similar to the special voice mode that is intermittently output during the high-probability time saving state (probability changing mode) control (for example, a part of the special voice mode (for example, the first half). , No. 1, etc.) may be output or may be completely the same as the special voice mode), and if the result of the change display is a big hit, it is based on a change pattern other than “melody reach”. Compared to the case where a big hit is performed by executing the variable display, after a big hit game state is finished, it is controlled to shift to a high-probability time-shortening state (probability change mode) at a high rate, and when "melody reach" is executed, it is a big hit. Informs that the ratio controlled to the high-probability time saving state (probability changing mode) after the jackpot gaming state is higher than the ratio controlled to other game states (production modes other than the probability changing mode).

Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) With big probability big hit to control to high probability time saving state after the game state ends (for example, 15R (right) probability variation big hit, 10R (right) probability variation big hit, 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, 10R (left) probability variation big hit, 15R (left ) If it is decided to rank up the probability variation big hit), it will be a big hit (eg 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit, 10R (left) normal big hit) after controlling the gaming state other than the high probability time saving state after finishing the big hit game state In comparison with the case, the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process) is performed so that the rate of determining the variation pattern for executing “melody reach” is high. The fluctuation pattern table used in the one fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) and the second fluctuation pattern setting process is configured. In this way, the player outputs a voice mode similar to the special voice mode output in the high-probability time-shortening state (probably changing mode) when a specific variable display is executed, so that the player has a high-probability time-shortening state (probably changing). Mode) is easily evoked, and expectations for a high-probability time saving state (probability change mode) are improved.

The special voice mode is composed of "intro", "A melody" and "chorus", and when a variation pattern for executing "melody reach" is received, as shown in FIG. The "intro" is output when starting, and the right decorative design that is variably displayed at the timing of ending this "intro" is stopped and displayed with the same design as the left decorative design to generate a reach. Then, when the reach effect of "melody reach" is started, the above "A melody" is output, and normally, the intermediate decoration pattern that is variably displayed at the timing of ending "A melody" is stopped and displayed, and the display result is derived and displayed. ..

On the other hand, when executing the reach development effect, which has a higher jackpot rate than the executed reach effect, that is, "melody development reach", which has a higher jackpot rate than the variation pattern for executing "melody reach". When the variation pattern is received, as shown in FIG. 213, “A melody” is ended at the timing of ending the reach effect, and “chorus” is output when the reach development effect is started. Then, at the timing of ending the "rust", the middle decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the display result is derived and displayed. In addition, when the variation pattern for executing "Melody development reach" is received, the intermediate decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in synchronization with the end of "A melody" (a state in which it slowly fluctuates up and down and is not completely stopped). Then, the middle decorative design may be displayed again and again at the timing of starting the output of "rust".

As described above, in this example, the larger the number of the configuration modes output in the variable display among the special voice modes including the plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody” and “Chorus”, the proportion of the big hit. Is configured to be higher (the ratio of jackpots in "melody development reach" is higher than that in "melody reach" (the jackpot expectation) is higher). Specifically, "melody development" rather than the expected jackpot of "melody reach" {(appearance rate of "melody reach")/(appearance rate of "out of melody reach" + appearance rate of "per melody reach") The above-mentioned fluctuations so that the degree of expectation of "big hit" of "reach" {(appearance rate of "reach of melody development reach")/(appearance rate of "out of reach of melody development + appearance rate of "reach of melody development reach")} is higher A fluctuation pattern table used in the pattern setting processing (first fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S82), second fluctuation pattern setting processing) is configured. Therefore, as the configuration mode of the special display mode is switched, the expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the high-probability time saving state can be improved.

In addition, in this example, when a big hit occurs in the variable display in which the "melody reach" is executed, it is configured to control the transition to the high-probability time saving state after the big hit game state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) "Melody reach" is executed by the above fluctuation pattern setting process (first fluctuation pattern setting process, second fluctuation pattern setting process) only when it is determined that the probability variation big hit to control to a high probability time saving state after the big hit game state ends When the big hit game state is finished and the big hit for controlling to a game state other than the high-probability time-saving state is reached, the change pattern for executing "melody reach" is not decided. Therefore, when "melody reach" is executed, the expectation for the high-probability time saving state can be improved, and the variable display during execution can be noticed.

Even when a big hit occurs in the variable display when "melody reach" is executed, after the big hit game state ends, the game state may be controlled to a state other than the high-probability time saving state. In this case, "melody reach" It is configured so that when the jackpot is executed in the variation display, the proportion of controlling the transition to the high-probability time saving state after the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the other reach is executed in the variation display. May be. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) Not only when it is decided to be a probable big hit that controls to a high-probability time-saving state after the jackpot game state is over, but also when it is a jackpot that is controlled to a game state other than the high-probability time-shortening state after the jackpot game state is reached, the melody reach It is possible to determine the variation pattern to execute, and if it is determined to be a probability variation big hit that controls to a high probability time saving state after the big hit game state, "melody development reach" at a higher rate than "melody reach" The fluctuation pattern table used in the fluctuation pattern setting process (first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82), second fluctuation pattern setting process) may be configured to be selected.

Further, in this case, the larger the number of the configuration modes output in the variable display among the special voice modes including the plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody” and “Chorus”, the larger the jackpot. It may be configured so that the ratio of controlling to the high-probability time-saving state becomes high after the big hit game state ends. Specifically, when controlling to a high-probability time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state, the fluctuation pattern setting process (first fluctuation pattern setting) so that "melody development reach" is selected at a higher rate than "melody reach" You may comprise the fluctuation pattern table used by a process (step S82) and a 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process. As a result, as the special display mode is switched, the expectation for the high-probability time-saving state can be improved.

Further, in this example, the "melody reach" that outputs a voice mode similar to the special voice mode output in the high-probability time-saving state is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the low-probability non-time-saving state (normal mode) A voice mode that is output in a low-probability non-time saving state (normal mode) when a "normal melody reach" that outputs a voice mode similar to the voice mode that is output in step 5 is executed and a big hit occurs. It is a low probability after the big hit game state ends at a higher rate (including things that are always controlled to a low probability non-time saving state (normal mode)) than when it was a big hit by executing another reach that does not output during variable display Execute "Time-shortening melody reach" that outputs to the non-time saving state (normal mode) or outputs a voice mode similar to the voice mode output in the low probability time saving state (time saving medium mode) during the variable display. When the jackpot is a big jackpot, it is output in a low-probability time-shortening state (time saving medium mode). It does not output the voice mode during variable display. State (including things to control in time saving mode) that control to low probability time saving state after the big hit game state, voice mode similar to the voice mode output in high probability non-time saving state (probability variation latency mode) Execute other reach that does not output the voice mode that is output in the high probability non-time saving state (probability variation latency mode) when a big hit is made by executing the "latent melody reach" output during the variation display. It is possible to execute things such as controlling to a high probability non-time saving state (probability variation latent mode) after the big hit game state ends at a higher rate than when it became a big hit (including things that always control to a high probability non-time saving state) It may be one that does.

In the high-probability non-time saving state and the low-probability non-time saving state, it is controlled to the probability variation latent mode in a mode (so-called latency probability variation) in which it is difficult to determine whether the high probability non-time saving state is controlled or the low probability non-time saving state is controlled. There are cases. In this case, when the "latent melody reach" is executed and a big hit occurs, a higher rate than when a big hit is achieved by executing another reach that does not output the voice mode output in the probability variation latent mode during variable display ( Be sure to include things that are controlled to a high probability non-time saving state) and control to a high probability non-time saving state after the big hit game state, or output in the normal mode when a "normal melody reach" is executed and a big hit occurs. A high probability non-time saving after the big hit game state ends at a higher rate (including things that are always controlled to a low probability non-time saving state) than when a big hit is executed by executing another reach that does not output the voice mode during variable display Control the state (for example, when the latency probability variation big hit to control the high-probability non-time saving state after the big hit game state ends, when the big hit becomes a low probability non-time saving state after the big hit game state ends Performing ``latent melody reach'' or controlling the odds to a low probability non-time saving state after the big hit game state results in a normal big hit. "Regular melody reach" may be executed). As a result, when a big hit occurs in "latent melody reach", it is controlled to a probability variation latent mode in which it is difficult to determine whether it is controlled to a high probability non-time saving state or a low probability non-time saving state after the big hit game state is over. However, it is possible to recognize that there is a high probability that the state is in the high probability non-time saving state or that the probability is controlled to the high probability non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the expectation for the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the "hidden melody reach" is executed, it is highly possible that the player is in a high-probability non-time saving state or is controlled to a high-probability non-time saving state after finishing the big hit game state. Desire and enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, in this case, the larger the number of the configuration modes output in the variable display among the special voice modes including the plurality of configuration modes of “intro”, “A melody” and “chorus”, the greater the hit. Sometimes, it may be configured such that the ratio of controlling to the high-probability non-time saving state becomes high after the jackpot gaming state ends. Specifically, in the case of controlling to a high probability non-time saving state after the jackpot gaming state, the fluctuation pattern setting process (first fluctuation pattern) so that "melody development reach" is selected at a higher rate than "melody reach". A fluctuation pattern table used in the setting process (step S82) and the second fluctuation pattern setting process may be configured. As a result, it is a special display mode that is switched during variable display that is a big hit even if it is controlled in the probability variation latent mode where it is difficult to determine whether it is controlling to a high probability non-time saving state or a low probability non-time saving state. It can be recognized that the higher the probability, the higher the probability of being controlled to the high probability non-time saving state, and the higher the expectation for the big hit gaming state.

Further, in this example, the switching timing of the configuration mode and the switching timing of the production (reach occurrence, end of the reach production (stop display of the medium decoration pattern when the reach development production is not executed), end of the reach development production (medium decoration design) Since it is synchronized with the stop display) of), the player can easily recognize the switching of the effect, the occurrence of the reach, the derivation display of the display result, and the like, and each configuration of the special sound mode being output. Since the mode and the effect content are in one-to-one correspondence, the player can grasp the effect content from the configuration mode of the output special voice mode without visually recognizing the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible (for example, when “A melody” is output, it is possible to know that the reach effect is being executed).

As described above, in this example, even if the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not visually recognized, it is suggested to control the mode during the probable variation after the jackpot gaming state by naturally changing the sound mode coming from the ear. Therefore, not only the player who visually recognizes the liquid crystal display device 1900 but also the player who deviates his or her line of sight from the liquid crystal display device 1900 can surely be made aware that the variable display of "melody reach" is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem of being overlooked when some information is suggested by the display contents such as displaying characters on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Furthermore, by recognizing that a player who is looking away from the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performing “melody reach”, the player can pay attention to the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 with an expectation for the big hit game state. You can

In this example, the special voice mode having the above-described plurality of configuration modes is used, but the special voice mode having one configuration mode may be used. In this case, the longer the output period of the special voice mode, the higher the proportion of the big hits may be, and the output of the special voice mode may be ended/restarted in synchronization with the effect switching timing. May be.

Further, in the above example, the voice mode output during variable display is configured to suggest the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends, but the period during which the voice state suggesting the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is output is output. The time and timing are not limited to those described above, but a part of the variable display (for example, during the reach performance, the reach development performance, or any one of the reach development until the reach is generated). A plurality of combinations).

In addition, as a result of the variable display this time, when it is a big hit, it is not limited to suggesting the gaming state after the big hit game state is ended, but as a result of the variable display executed after the next time, a big hit game You may make it suggest the game state which shift control is carried out after the state ends. Specifically, in the production pre-determination process (steps S45, S55) executed when the start winning is generated, when it is determined that the probability is a big jackpot that is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the variable display based on the starting prize is displayed After the variable display is performed once before starting or after performing the "melody reach" over multiple times of variable display, the variable display that is out of the range is displayed, and then the start prize that is determined to be a probable variation big hit in the production pre-determination process. In the variable display based on, the variable display that is a big hit may be executed in a mode other than “melody reach” or “melody reach”. Also, in the production pre-determination process (steps S45, S55), when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot other than the probability variation jackpot that is controlled to the high-probability time-saving state after the jackpot game state is finished, or when it is determined that the jackpot is not started, the start is performed at a predetermined ratio. It is also possible to execute the "melody reach" in the variable display before starting the variable display based on the winning, and execute the variable display that is out of alignment. Further, in this case, the ratio of executing "melody reach" in the variable display based on the starting prize is set to be lower than the ratio of executing "melody reach" in the variable display based on the starting prize determined to be the probability variation big hit. By configuring, if a big hit occurs when "Melody Reach" is executed, the rate of control to shift to the probability changing mode after the jackpot game state can be made higher than the rate of control to shift to another effect mode. ..

Further, in the above-described example, an object that suggests the game state (production mode) after the jackpot game state is finished is shown by the voice mode output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. during variable display, but a specific production mode ( For example, during the probability changing mode), a mode similar to a mode (for example, at least one of the means for performing effects such as a speaker, a movable body, a lamp/LED, etc.) other than the liquid crystal display device 1900 Of the mode executed during the effect mode (may be completely the same as the mode executed during the specific effect mode) may be executed during the variable display. Anything can be used. When the game state (production mode) after the jackpot game state is suggested by the light emission mode of the lamp/LED (for example, light emission color or blinking pattern; special light emission mode), or the movable mode of the movable body (for example, a specific effect) The variable display related to a specific performance mode is executed even when the game state (production mode) after the jackpot game state is suggested by a movable body that moves only during the mode; a special movable mode) Can be easily recognized by the player.

As described above, in this example, during the probability changing mode (high probability time saving state), the effect that emphasizes that the probability changing middle mode (high probability time saving state) is emphasized (in this example, the special voice mode is intermittent (repeated)). Output to) is executed. By imprinting the effect that is executed during the probability changing mode (high probability time saving state) on the player's mind, this effect and the probability changing middle mode (high probability saving time state) are strongly associated and stored. The probability changing mode (high probability time saving state) can be immediately recalled when the effect executed during (high probability time saving state) is executed. Also, in this example, as an effect that emphasizes the probability changing mode (high-probability time-saving state), the special voice mode is intermittently (repeatedly) output, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is only necessary to perform an effect that emphasizes that it is a time saving state, for example, a light emitting mode of a lamp/LED (for example, a light emitting color or a blinking pattern), a movable mode of a movable body (for example, movable only during a high probability time saving state). A movable body), a speaker voice mode (special voice mode), or the like, or an arbitrary combination (all may be performed).

Further, when it is suggested by the planar display mode of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is difficult for the player to notice that it is suggested if the display contents are not watched, but as in this example, the player naturally listens to the ears. Liquid crystal display by the moving sound mode and the light emitting mode of lamps/LEDs that naturally come into your eyes when you are in the visual field by physically moving the sound mode and the three-dimensional model Even if the display content of the device 1900 is not watched, the player feels a sense of discomfort and is controlled in a manner different from normal, and is thus controlled in a manner similar to the manner performed during a specific effect mode. You can easily notice that you are.

That is, even for a player who is playing a game for the first time on the game machine or for a player who does not know the effect contents of the game machine, the game machine is controlled to shift to the high probability state and is controlled to the probability changing mode so that another game machine is controlled. It is possible to notify the voice mode output in an advantageous state by listening to the voice mode output from the gaming machine that has acquired a large amount of prize balls by outputting a voice mode different from. Then, the same voice mode as the voice mode output in the above advantageous state is output from the game machine in which the player is playing, so that his/her game machine is also in the advantageous state? Can be expected. In addition, since the player does not always look at the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player may overlook the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by paying attention to whether or not a game ball is won in the starting openings 2101 and 2102. Even by setting the voice mode to the same voice mode as the voice mode executed during the particular effect mode, it is possible to make the gaming machine in which the player is playing the opportunity aware again, and The display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be paid attention to.

Further, the same effect can be obtained when the light emission mode of the lamp/LED is set to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode executed in the specific effect mode. That is, the light emission of the gaming machine that obtains a large amount of prize balls by controlling the light emission of the lamps/LEDs in a manner different from that of the other gaming machines by controlling the transition to the high probability state and controlling the probability changing mode. Looking at the mode, when I know the light emission mode of the lamp/LED that is executed in an advantageous state, I want to be in that state as a player's psychology. In this state, when the gaming machine in which one's game is suddenly controlled to emit light in the same manner as the light emitting mode executed in the specific effect mode, it is expected that the gaming machine in which one is playing has a chance. To do. For example, during the production mode other than the specific production mode, the lamp/LED provided mainly on the game board 4 is controlled to emit light, and during the specific production mode, the lamp/LED provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are provided. The light emission is controlled over a wide range with the provided lamps/LEDs, the brightness of the lamps/LEDs is increased during the specific effect mode than in the effect modes other than the specific effect mode, and during the specific effect mode. The lamps/LEDs are made to blink at intervals shorter than those in the effect modes other than the specific effect mode, and during the specific effect mode, the emission color is more flashy than in the effect modes other than the specific effect mode (for example, the specific effect mode). For example, by setting the emission color of the red system to blue and the emission color of the blue system or the green system in the other effect mode), it is possible to make the player who has not seen the liquid crystal display device 1900 notice, and again. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be paid attention to, and by extension, the fact that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to the specific effect mode can be appealed to a third person.

Further, the same effect can be obtained when the movable mode of the movable body is the same as the movable mode executed in the specific effect mode. That is, the movable mode of the game machine in which the movable body is movably controlled in a mode different from other game machines by controlling the transition to the high-probability state and controlling in the probability changing mode to obtain a large amount of prize balls. When you know the movable mode of the movable body that is executed in an advantageous state, you have the desire to be in a similar state, and suddenly the game machine you are playing is executed during a specific staging mode. When the movable body is movably controlled in the same movable manner as the movable manner, it is expected that the gaming machine in which the player is playing has a chance. For example, a movable body that is provided in the game area 1100 and does not move during a performance mode other than the specific performance mode is operated at a predetermined interval, or a movable body that does not move during a performance mode other than the specific performance mode is displayed on a liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is viewed by overlapping the device 1900 to the front and causing the movable body to operate at a shorter interval during a specific effect mode than during an effect mode other than the specific effect mode. The player who did not exist can be made aware that something is happening, and the contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be made to pay attention again, so that a third party is also controlled to a specific effect mode. You can appeal that.

Further, unlike the display contents of the flat liquid crystal display device 1900, since it is suggested by the sound mode, the operation mode of the movable body, and the light emission mode, the control mode of these effect means in other gaming machines can be easily visually recognized. It is possible to grasp the control mode of the production means by visually observing the control state of the other gaming machine in the specific production mode, and suddenly the production means is in the specific production mode in a state other than the specific production mode. It is possible to expect that the control will be performed in a specific effect mode when the control is performed in the same manner as the control mode, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

In this way, by controlling the effect means, which makes it easy for a third person to easily recognize the driving state, to the same effect mode as the mode executed during the specific effect mode, the special effect mode is set when the big hit occurs. Since it is suggested that the ratio of transition is high (or transition to a specific effect mode), it is possible to receive the envy of the player by executing the effect and give the player a sense of superiority.

In addition, by visually confirming that the effect means is controlled in the same manner as that executed in the particular effect mode in the other game machine, it is desired that such effect be executed in the own game machine. You can give a strong desire and also a desire to immerse yourself in a sense of superiority.

In addition, by suggesting that the above-mentioned effect is controlled to a state with a higher degree of advantage (a state in which the expected value of winning a prize ball is high) out of a plurality of types of gaming states after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the gaming enjoyment is further improved. It is also possible to achieve For example, when controlling to the probability changing mode (high probability time saving state) after the jackpot gaming state is over, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot gaming state is larger. Control to a large jackpot gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state in which the total number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state is larger, such as a 15R jackpot gaming state when controlling to the 5R jackpot gaming state and the 15R jackpot gaming state) When it becomes a big hit, you can execute the same mode as the probability changing mode during variable display (a big hit with a large number of prize balls that can be obtained is higher than a big hit with a small number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game state) It may be executed at a rate), the number of times is cut after the big hit game state is ended (the control of the high probability state is ended when the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed; a so-called ST machine) When controlling in the probability changing mode (high-probability time-short state), it is possible to execute more fluctuation display in the probability changing middle mode (high-probability time-short state) (for example, one of 50 and 100 times fluctuation display in the probability changing mode) When it becomes possible to execute 100 times of fluctuation display, it is possible to execute the same mode as the probability changing mode during fluctuation display (the number of fluctuation display times that can be executed in the probability changing mode). The big hit with a larger number of fluctuating displays that can be executed may be executed at a higher rate than the big hit with a small number).

Specifically, if the 15R (right) probability variation big hit is determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process or the corresponding process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the first variation pattern setting process and In the second variation pattern setting process, the 15R (right) probability variation big hit time variation pattern table is selected to determine the variation pattern, and "melody reach" is determined in the 15R (right) probability variation big hit time variation pattern table. It is selected when the ratio is determined to be another probability variation jackpot controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the number of award balls obtainable is smaller than the jackpot gaming state executed when the 15R (right) probability variation jackpot is achieved. It may be set higher than the variation pattern table (the variation pattern table selected when another probability variation jackpot is determined may be configured not to be determined as “melody reach”). 15R (right) In the big hit game state executed when it becomes a probability variation big hit, since the player can obtain a larger amount of award balls than in the big hit game state executed when other big hits occur, the "melody" By executing "reach", it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Similarly, in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the corresponding process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, in the probability variation middle mode (high-probability time-short state), it is possible to execute variable display 100 times in probability variation jackpot. If determined, the ST100 big jackpot variation pattern table is selected in the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process to determine the variation pattern. The rate of deciding to "melody reach" is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern table that is selected when it is determined to be a probabilistic jackpot that can execute fluctuation display less than 100 times in the probabilistic change mode (high probability time saving state). Set (configuring the fluctuation pattern table to be selected as "melody reach" when it is determined as a probability big jackpot that can execute fluctuation display less than 100 times in the probability changing middle mode (high probability time saving state). May be done). In the probability variation middle mode (high-probability time-saving state), the probability variation jackpot that can execute the variation display 100 times can perform the variation display less than 100 times. Since there is a high possibility that the game will be played and it will be in a more advantageous state for the player, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing the “melody reach”.

It should be noted that, when the number of times is controlled to the probability changing mode (high-probability time-short state) and the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (for example, 50 times), the transition control from the high-probability state to the low-probability state is performed. , At this time, the control of the time saving state may be ended at the same time and the transition control to the low probability non-time saving state may be performed, or until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without ending the control of the time saving state (for example, the big hit game state end The transition control may be continuously performed to the low-probability time-saving state until the variable display is performed 100 times later) or until the big hit game state again. In this case, the first ST jackpot that controls the time saving state at the same time and performs the transition control to the low-probability non-time saving state when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed as the probability change mode of the number of times of cuts is predetermined. When the variable display of the number of times is executed, the second ST big hit that controls the transition to the low probability time saving state without terminating the control of the time saving state, the first special If the second ST big hit is determined in step S123 of the symbol stop symbol setting process or the corresponding process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the second ST big hit variation in the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process A pattern table is selected and a variation pattern is determined, and a rate for determining "melody reach" in the variation pattern table during the second ST big hit is selected when other big hits including the first ST big hit are decided. Set higher than the variation pattern table (the variation pattern table selected when other big hits including the first ST big hit may be configured not to be determined as "melody reach") May be. In the 2nd ST big hit, even if control of transition from a high probability state to a low probability state is finished after a predetermined number of variable displays are finished, the control in the time saving state is continued without being finished. As the number of prizes to 2101 and 2102 increases, the chances of jackpot lottery increase, and because it is in a more advantageous state for the player, the "melody reach" is executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the above-described example, drive control of the effect means (for example, at least one of the means for executing the effect such as the speaker, the movable body, the lamp/LED, etc.) is performed in the same manner as that in the specific effect mode during the variable display. However, in the case of a big hit in the variable display, after the big hit game state is finished, it is controlled to a specific effect mode and at least one of means for executing effects such as a speaker, a movable body, a lamp/LED, etc. ) Shows that the drive control is started in the mode in the specific effect mode, but when "melody reach" is executed and a big hit is achieved, the big hit and the big hit game state are executed. That is, the production means which is difficult for the player to understand is executed, and the production means is driven in the same manner as in the particular production mode before the big hit symbol is derived and displayed and before the transition control to the specific mode. It may be controlled. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215.

Peripheral control MPU4140a receives the variation pattern of melody reach 2R certainty variation jackpot that executes "melody reach" and controls to 2R jackpot gaming state of opening for a short time (about 0.5 seconds) and then shifts to high probability time saving state. Then, the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is started, and at the same time, the speaker 130, 222, 262, etc., starts to output the same sound mode as the special sound mode (FIG. 214(A)), and left, middle, and At a predetermined timing during the variable display of the right decorative design (in the example shown in FIG. 214(B), the left and right decorative designs stop at the same design and the middle decorative design reaches the reach not yet stopped) Suddenly, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off so that the display disappears) (FIG. 214C).

Then, after blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), whiteout is gradually performed from the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and white display is performed). (FIGS. 214 (D) and (E)), and when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is completely white-out, “Probability changing mode inrush!” is displayed to display the probability changing mode (high probability time saving state). ) Is notified to the player (FIG. 214(F)), and control of the probability changing mode (high probability time reduction state) is started (FIG. 214(G)).

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 215, the special winning opening is opened twice for a short period of time from the time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out to the time when it is gradually whited out and "Probably changing mode rush!" is displayed. 2R jackpot game state is executed. That is, the predetermined effect (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is gradually blacked out and then gradually whited out) is executed without deriving the display result of the decorative pattern and without notifying that the big hit has occurred. However, it is difficult for the player to understand that the 2R jackpot gaming state is entered by executing the 2R jackpot gaming state during the effect. Then, the display result of the decorative symbol is not derived and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays "Probably changing mode rush!", which can give a surprise to the player.

Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be a voice mode similar to the special voice mode (for example, a part of the special voice mode (for example, the first half or No. 1) or the same as the special voice mode). The output of the special voice mode is continued (repeatedly executed) until the control of the probability changing mode is finished. Therefore, by outputting the special voice mode during the variable display, it is possible to remind the player of the probability-changing mode and to recognize that it was controlled to the probability-changing mode for some time, which gives unexpectedness and improves the enjoyment of the game. be able to.

In the above example, as shown in FIG. 215, it is configured to start the output of the special voice mode when starting the variable display based on the variable pattern of the melody reach 2R probability variation big hit, but during the variable display, that is, the special symbol. It suffices that the output of the special voice mode is started within the period from the start of the variable display of 1 to the display of the display result of the special symbol.

Further, it may be executed in combination with the above-mentioned "melody reach" for outputting the special sound mode during the variable display and stopping and displaying the big hit symbol of the decorative symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the sudden change control is performed in the probability changing mode or whether the big hit game state occurs, and the variation of the production increases, so that the player does not get tired.

Further, in the above example, it is configured to always control to the probability variation latent mode in the high probability non-time saving state, but it is configured to control to either the probability variation latency mode or the probability variation non-time saving mode in the high probability non-time saving state. , When the probability variation latent mode is controlled in the high probability non-time saving mode, the production means (for example, a speaker, a movable body, a lamp/LED, etc. can be continuously produced from the variation display in the same manner as the probability variation non-time saving mode. At least one of the executing means) may be drive-controlled to control (promote) the transition from the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-time saving mode.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the “promotion melody reach” in the probability variation latent mode during the high probability non-time saving state, and receives the variation pattern of the promotion melody reach, which is a failure, and then the left, middle, and right decorations are displayed. The variable display of the design is started and the output of the same voice mode as the specific voice mode output from the speaker 130, 222, 262, etc. during the probability variation non-time saving mode is started, and the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is suddenly blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off to disappear the display) at a predetermined timing.

Then, after blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), whiteout is gradually performed from the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and white display is performed). Is performed, and based on that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has completely whited out, "probability variation non-time saving mode rush!" is displayed to control (promote) the transition to the probability variation non-time saving mode (high probability non-time saving state). This is notified to the player and control of the probability variation non-time saving mode is started.

As described above, in the case of controlling in the high-probability non-time saving state and in the case of controlling in the probability variation latent mode as the effect mode, the same voice mode as the specific voice mode (for example, one of the specific voice modes is displayed during the variable display. Part (for example, the first half part or No. 1 or the like, or may be completely the same as the specific voice mode), and then outputs the specific voice mode until the control of the probability variation non-shortening mode ends. Continue output (execute repeatedly). Therefore, by outputting the specific voice mode during the variable display, it is possible to remind the player of the probabilistic non-time saving mode and to recognize that the probabilistic non-time saving mode was controlled by the probabilistic non-time saving mode, giving unexpectedness and amusement of the game. Can be improved.

Note that, in the above example, in the variable display that outputs the specific voice mode, without displaying the deviating pattern, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is shown to notify that the transition control to the positive variation non-shortening mode is performed after blacking out. Not limited to this, the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be subjected to normal variable display without being blacked out, and after deviating and displaying the deviating symbol, notification of the transition control to the positive variation non-shortening mode may be given. As a result, even if the display result is out of order, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by promoting the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-time saving mode, which is advantageous to the player. Further, in this case, a predetermined combination (for example, a combination of symbols including all “1”, “3”, and “5”) of the outlying symbols may be displayed.

In addition, even when the transition control (promotion) from the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-time saving mode is not performed, the specific voice mode may be output during the variable display at a predetermined ratio (so-called gaze). In this case, the output period of the specific voice mode during the variable display may be shorter when the probability variation latent mode is continued than when the transition control (promotion) to the probability variation non-time saving mode is performed. For example, in the case of controlling the transition to the probability variation non-shortening mode, the output of the specific voice mode is started at a predetermined timing after the variation display is started (may be the same as the start of the variation display) and then the probability variation While the specific voice mode is continuously output until the time-saving mode is ended, in the case where the probability-changing latent mode is continued without controlling the shift to the probability-changing non-time-saving mode, a predetermined timing after starting the variable display ( The output of the specific voice mode may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display), and the output of the specific voice mode is stopped before the display of the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is removed without being blacked out. The symbols may be stopped and displayed. As a result, even when the transition control (promotion) to the probability variation non-time saving mode is not performed, the expectation for the probability variation non-time saving mode can be improved.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged below the center accessory 2500. A predetermined lottery result is drawn when it is received in the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 that has been selected, and the predetermined region including the lottery result and the two projection regions TR arranged near where the player sits In response to the detection of the object from the object detection means 2530 for detecting the player inside, the projector unit 2150 provided on each of the left and right sides of the special winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 and corresponding to the projection area TR in which the object is detected are associated with the projector unit 2150. At the same time, the light-emitting decorations such as the right-side decoration unit 200, the left-side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 that light-emit the outer circumference of the glass plate 594 that defines the front end of the game area 1100 are turned off or turned off. The light of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 to the projection area TR is reflected to the game area 1100 in the projection area TR (a part of the player's body), and further, the game is performed on the transparent plate-shaped glass plate 594. It will be reflected to the person side. At this time, the light-emitting decorations of the respective decoration units 200, 240, 280 are turned off or turned off, so that the light directly radiated to the player is reduced and the inside of the game area 1100 is relatively dark. Therefore, the light (image) projected from the projector unit 2150 to the light projecting area TR, reflected by the light projecting area TR, and further reflected by the glass plate 594 of the door frame 5 toward the player becomes relatively strong. The image (light) reflected by the glass plate 594 from the player side becomes conspicuous. As described above, the image reflected by the glass plate 594 to the player side is an image reflected by the light projecting region TR and then by the glass plate 594. Therefore, when viewed from the player side, the light source is The (projector unit 2150) is not visible, but a part of the player's body in the image projected in the projection region TR by the projector unit 2150 or in the projection region TR illuminated by the projection of the image is reflected on the glass plate 594. It will be visible. Therefore, when the projector unit 2150 is caused to emit light in accordance with the gaming state, the image projected on the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and a part of the body of the player are displayed, so that the conventional pachinko machine is operated. It is possible to show the player an effect that is completely different from the effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900, the movable decorative body, etc., and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and to perform an unexpectedly high effect. It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being strongly attracted and the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, as described above, when the projector unit 2150 emits light in accordance with the game state, a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR is reflected on the glass plate 594 and the projector unit 2150 is projected on a part of the body. Since an image is displayed, the player looks at what is displayed on the glass plate 594 and pays attention to the inside of the projection area TR (a part of his/her body on which the image is projected) as if "what is it?" In this way, it becomes possible to notice the irradiation of light from the projector unit 2150, and by recognizing the light emission of the projector unit 2150, it is possible to think that something is good, and expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest by increasing the height.

In addition, since the image is projected from the projector unit 2150 onto a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR, the image projected on the player can be changed by moving the player on which the image is projected. Because the range changes or the part where the image is projected is three-dimensional rather than flat, the appearance of the projected image changes and the image can be expanded or contracted when the player moves. Even a single image can be changed in various ways, and it is possible for the player to enjoy the appearance of the projected image and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and deteriorating the interest.

Further, an image is projected from the projector unit 2150 to the projection area TR, and by projecting a relatively pinpoint image, a person other than the player who plays the game on the pachinko machine 1 (another player or a pachinko machine). It is possible to make the light emission of the projector unit 2150 less noticeable to the employees of the game hall where 1 is installed, etc.). In other words, it is possible to make only the player who plays the game with the pachinko machine 1 notice the effect using the projector unit 2150, and the player can enjoy the effect using the projector unit 2150 without being noticed by other players. Since it is possible, a chance is given after the end of the effect by the projector unit 2150 that emits light in accordance with the lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 and the like (for example, the state where the special winning opening 2103 can be received). Even if the game does not arrive (in the case of a lost production), the other players are not aware of the production and the player can pretend to be calm, and even if the lost production is It is possible to entertain without hesitation, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the projection region TR is located below the center of the game region 1100 in the vertical direction, and when a player of ordinary height sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, it is below the head of the player. Since the range of is the projection region TR, it is possible to suppress the light of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 from directly reaching the player's eyes as much as possible, and the player emits light to cause the player to It is possible to prevent the user from feeling dazzling, and it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the dazzling and deteriorating the interest.

Further, since the projector unit 2150 is provided in the attacker unit 2100 arranged below the center of the game area 1100, even if the projector unit 2150 emits light at a position lower than the eye level of the player, The light from the projector unit 2150 can be prevented from directly reaching the player's eyes as much as possible, and can be made less noticeable by the player. Therefore, by seeing the image projected on the projection area TR, the image reflected on the glass plate 594, and the like to the player, the player can be made aware of the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 and the impact at the time of the effect start. Since it can be strengthened, it is possible to enhance the unexpectedness of the light emission effect and strongly attract the player's interest, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, since the projector unit 2150 that projects an image onto the projection area TR corresponding to the position of the player detected by the object detection means 2530 is made to emit light, the image (light) from the projector unit 2150 is surely specified area. An image can be projected from a player (object) inside, and an image can be projected from the projector unit 2150 corresponding to the optimum position (projection region TR) according to the player's posture, and the effect by the projector unit 2150 It is possible to further enhance the effect and prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Further, since the projector units 2150 are arranged on the left and right sides of the special winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100, the projector unit 2150 can be made inconspicuous, and the light of the projector unit 2150 can reach the eyes of the player directly. In addition to being suppressed, even when the light of the projector unit 2150 is directly visible to the player when the projector unit 2150 is caused to emit light, the player has the illusion that it is a part of the light emitting decoration of the attacker unit 2100. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light-emission effect by the projector unit 2150 from being directly noticed, and to reliably achieve the above-described operational effects.

Further, since the object detecting means 2530 is provided in the center role object 2500 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100, it is arranged in front of the glass plate 594 (glass unit 590) including the projection area TR. The player (object) in the predetermined area (detection area) can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely detect the object in the predetermined area and surely achieve the above-described effects. Since the center role object 2500 is provided with the object detection means 2530, the object detection means 2530 can be attached at a desired position only by attaching the center role object 2500 to the game panel 1200. It is possible to simplify the labor required for assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, after inserting the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 into the opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, after the game panel 1200 is inserted through the frame of the center accessory 2500 so that the player can visually recognize it. Since the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed on the side, it becomes possible for the player side to sufficiently see through the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 and the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the effect using the projector unit 2150 is achieved. In addition, an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be performed, and various effects can be presented to the player so as not to get tired, and various effects can entertain the player, It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Further, in a normal state, by performing an effect by the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is possible to enhance a premium feeling for the effect by the projector unit 2150, it is possible to further enhance the impact of the effect by the projector unit 2150, and to play a game. It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for, and to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1200, and by definition, in the effect produced by the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player's viewpoint is located on the rear side of the game panel 1200, and the projector unit Since the player's point of view can be positioned in front of the game panel 1200 (glass unit 590) in the effect produced by the light emission of 2150, the player's viewpoint can be adjusted according to the device (projector unit 2150, liquid crystal display device 1900, etc.) used for the effect. It is possible to change the viewpoint, prevent the production from becoming monotonous, and make the pachinko machine 1 hard to get tired of.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the arm unit base 3251 that rotatably supports (axially supports) the base end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is arranged above the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper arm unit When the 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are in the housed position and the housed position, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are also located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and are invisible to the player. In this state, when the upper arm drive motor 3254 rotates the upper arm unit 3300 from the stored position to the appearance position in accordance with the game state, the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300 moves down together with the forearm unit 3350 to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3300. Further, when the forearm drive motor 3307 rotates the forearm unit 3350 from the stored position to the deployed position, the tip side of the forearm unit 3350 rotates in a direction away from the upper arm unit 3300. It is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the arm unit 3250 extends on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Also, when the forearm unit 3350 is pivotally moved from the stored position to the deployed position by the forearm drive motor 3307 according to the game state, the tip end side of the forearm unit 3350 descends and appears on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, Furthermore, when the upper arm drive motor 3254 rotates the upper arm unit 3300 from the stored position to the appearance position, the upper arm unit 3300 appears and descends on the front surface side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as to push out the forearm unit 3350. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 as a whole largely change the form (shape) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, by the two upper arm units 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 appearing on the front surface side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the game state, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that makes a strange movement, which is unprecedented. Not only can the player be surprised, but the player can be made to think that something is good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, since the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be separately driven to rotate by the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the forearm drive motor 3307, which are independent of each other, the form of the entire arm unit 3250 can be variously changed, and the game can be performed. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and by providing the arm unit 3250 capable of various movements, it is possible to prevent the movement (movable effect) of the arm unit 3250 from getting tired, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, a forearm unit 3350 that rotates about the tip end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is further provided on the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300 that rotates about the base end side. In other words, since the arm unit 3250 having the bisection is provided, it is possible to express the arm parts of the creatures (including a predetermined character) such as humans and animals with the entire arm unit 3250. It is possible to embody a movable effect capable of attracting more strongly and to enjoy the movement of the arm unit 3250.

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are configured to be rotationally moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the game state, and the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blocked by the arm unit 3250. Therefore, it is possible to make the appearance (rotation) of the arm unit 3250 stand out from the player, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the decorative unit, and entertain the player with the movable effect by the arm unit 3250. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 conspicuous by the arm unit 3250, and it is possible to easily select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are arranged on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and when the upper arm unit 3300 and the like are positioned to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 for appearance drive (movable effect), the upper arm unit 3300. And the like are rotationally driven so as to move downward, so that it is possible to reduce the load on the upper arm drive motor 3254, the forearm drive motor 3307, etc. supported by the gravity acting on the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350. At the same time, the rotation speed can be increased to allow the arm unit 3250 to appear speedily, and the impact at the time of appearance can be increased to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Further, a forearm drive motor 3307 for rotationally driving the forearm unit 3350 is arranged at the proximal end side of the upper arm unit 3300, and rotation from the forearm drive motor 3307 is performed by the transmission rotator 3311, the link member 3312, etc. Since it is transmitted to the forearm unit 3350 pivotally supported on the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300, compared to the case where the relatively heavy forearm drive motor 3307 is arranged on the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300, It is possible to reduce the rotational moment applied to (act on) the moving shaft core as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress an increase in load on the upper arm drive motor 3254. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the size of the upper arm drive motor 3254 or the like in order to make the upper arm drive motor 3254 or the like strong, so that it is relatively easy to secure a space for arranging the upper arm unit 3300, and the upper arm unit 3300 can be extended. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with an outstanding arm unit 3250. Further, since it is not necessary to use a component having high strength and rigidity as a component to make the upper arm drive motor 3254 etc. durable, the cost for the upper arm drive motor 3254 etc. (pachinko machine 1) increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the forearm unit 3350 is provided with a transmission pin 3351b which is eccentric from the axis of the second shaft portion 3301b, and further has a transmission rotary body 3311 having a crank pin 3311b which is revolved by the forearm drive motor 3307, and a crank at both ends. Since the rod-shaped link member 3312 that pivotally supports the pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b is provided, when the transmission rotary body 3311 is rotated by the forearm drive motor 3307 according to the game state, the link-shaped link is formed. The crank pin 311b having the base end side of the member 3312 supported by the connecting shaft is revolved, and the transmission pin 3351b is pushed or pulled by the link member 3312 according to the revolving direction of the crank pin 3311b. Since it revolves around the sun, the forearm unit 3350 can be reliably rotated.

Further, the rotation of the transmission rotary body 3311 arranged on the proximal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is transmitted to the second shaft portion 3301b (forearm unit 3350) on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 by the rod-shaped link member 3312. Since the long and slender link member 3312 is arranged in the upper arm unit 3300, the rotation from the forearm drive motor 3254 is set to a second value as compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted by a plurality of gears. It is possible to reduce the weight of the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting to the shaft portion 3301b (second rotation shaft 3351a), and it is possible to prevent the load on the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like from increasing. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the size of the upper frame rain motor 3254 or the like and make it durable, and the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the upper arm unit 3300, the crank pin 3311b of the transmission rotary body 3311 has a link axis connecting the center of the crank pin 3311b and the center of the transmission pin 3351b to one side (upper side) with respect to the rotation center of the transmission rotary body 3311. ) And the position where the link axis revolves to the other side (lower side) with respect to the rotation center of the transmission rotary body 3311, and the crank pin 3311b moves to the transmission rotary body 3311. Since the forearm unit 3350 is set to the storage position when it is slightly revolved to the one side with respect to the center of rotation, the forearm unit 3350 is stored to the storage position, that is, the crank pin 3311b is slightly moved to one side (upper side). In the revolved position, the direction of the force acting on the crank pin 3311b via the link member 3312 by the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 is such that the crank pin 3311b is located on one side (upper side, counterclockwise direction in front view). ), the crank pin 3311b (transmission rotor 3311) has a revolution range restricted by a slit 3311c so that it does not revolve to one side any more. Without stopping, it will continue to stop at the position slightly revolved to one side. Therefore, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the retracted position, even if the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 acts on the crank pin 3311b via the link member 3312, the crank pin 3311b does not revolve and the transmission rotor 3311 does not rotate. That is, since it is possible to lock (prevent) the transmission rotary body 3311 from rotating naturally, it is possible to prevent the rotational driving force due to the rotation moment from acting on the rotation shaft of the forearm drive motor 3307 via the transmission rotary body 3311. It can be avoided. Therefore, in order to maintain the forearm unit 3250 in the stored position, it is not necessary to continue driving the forearm drive motor 3307, and the load on the forearm drive motor 3307 is reduced, and the forearm drive motor 3307 and the like are damaged early. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted and to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the forearm drive motor 3307 or the like, and to prevent the interest of the player from being lowered by the interrupting the game. ..

Further, as described above, since the forearm unit 3350 can be maintained in the storage position without applying a load to the forearm drive motor 3307, it is necessary to use an expensive forearm drive motor 3307 equipped with a brake mechanism. Therefore, the cost of the forearm drive motor 3307 (pachinko machine 1) can be prevented from increasing.

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are provided with a plurality of LEDs (the upper arm decoration board 3305 and the forearm decoration board 3353) capable of emitting light according to the game state, and the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are displayed on the liquid crystal display. Since the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs when the device 1900 is pivotally moved to the front side, the arm unit 3250 is made conspicuous to the player. It is possible to make the arm unit 3250 capable of strongly attracting the player's interest, and the player pays attention to the arm unit 3250 to ensure the movable effect and the light emission effect by the arm unit 3250. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 is attached to the rear arm of the upper arm decoration 3304 and the transmission arm 3311 and the link member 3312, etc., which are attached to the rear side of the upper arm decoration 3304 and have a three-dimensional decoration. It is configured to include a translucent upper arm base 3301 and an upper arm decoration substrate 3305 that is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Since the upper arm unit 3300 is irradiated with light, the entire upper arm unit 3300 can be brightly illuminated and decorated so that the shape and decoration of the upper arm ornament 3304 can be seen more easily, and the decorative effect of the upper arm unit 3300 can be further enhanced. At the same time, the upper arm unit 3300 can be made conspicuous to attract the player's attention.

Further, the upper arm decoration board 3305 provided with a plurality of LEDs is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 that supports the upper arm decoration body 3304 from the rear side, and the upper arm decoration board 3305 (LED) is removed from the upper arm decoration body 3304. Since the light is emitted as far away as possible, the light emitted from the LED toward the back side of the upper arm ornament 3304 can be diffused to the upper arm ornament 3304, and the upper arm ornament 3304 can be irradiated with the light. 3304 can be uniformly light-emitted and decorated. That is, since the upper arm unit 3300 can be neatly illuminated and decorated, the appearance of the upper arm unit 3300 can be improved, the decorative effect of the upper arm unit 3300 can be enhanced, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lowered.

Further, since the link member 3312 and the like arranged on the front side of the upper arm decoration board 3305 are made to have a light-transmitting property, the light from the upper arm decoration board 3305 (LED) is passed through the light-transmitting portion. The decorative body 3304 can be satisfactorily irradiated, and the upper arm decorative body 3304 can be neatly illuminated.

Further, since a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided in the game area 1100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 that displays an effect image visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500 is provided, a conventional pachinko machine is used. It is possible to make a pachinko machine 1 with an atmosphere similar to that of a machine, and it is possible to prevent the player who is familiar with conventional pachinko machines from feeling uncomfortable, and this pachinko machine as a pachinko machine for playing. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made as shown below without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 100 Door frame base unit 200 Right side decoration unit (outer decoration unit)
204 Side upper decoration member (decoration member)
214 Decoration board on the right side (decoration board)
214a LED
214b LED
214c LED
216 Lower right side decorative board (decorative board)
216a LED
216b LED
240 Left side decoration unit (outside decoration unit)
244 Side upper decoration member (decoration member)
254 Decoration board on the left side (decoration board)
254a LED
254b LED
256 Lower left side decorative board (decorative board)
256a LED
256b LED
280 Upper decoration unit (outer decoration unit)
281 Front decoration member (decoration member)
286 Upper decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
286a LED
286b LED
288 Lower surface decorative member (decorative member)
1100 game area 1110 front component member 1200 game panel 1210 panel plate 1215 opening 1220 panel holder 1900 liquid crystal display devices 1901a to 1901d first reserved display area 1902a to 1902d second reserved display area 2000 table unit 2100 attacker unit (reception unit)
2101 First starting port (reception port)
2102 Second starting port (reception port, variable reception port)
2103 Grand prize hole (reception entrance, variable reception)
2104 General prize hole (reception)
2105 Movable piece 2106 Opening/closing member 2121 Starting port solenoid 2124 Attacker solenoid 2150 Projector unit (projection device)
2150R right projector unit 2150L left projector unit 2152 projector main body 2156 light source 2157 lens group 2158 image film 2500 center accessory 2501 window 2502 flange 2503 peripheral wall 2504 warp inlet 2505 warp outlet 2510 stage 2514 chance inlet 2515 chance outlet 2530 object detection Means 2531 Upper object sensor 2532 Left object sensor 2533 Right object sensor 2534 Lower object sensor 2550 Second attacker unit 2552 Second prize hole TR Projection area (specific area)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with a game board capable of flowing down a game ball on the front side, and a ball entry unit provided on the game board and having a winning opening into which the game ball can enter,
The winning opening is opened and closed by an opening and closing member that switches between an open state and a closed state,
On the front side of the ball entering unit, a cover portion that forms a game area as a back area is provided,
Distribution guide means for guiding the distribution of the game balls is provided on the board surface side of the cover portion,
As the distribution guide means, a branch portion having an inclined surface provided as an immovable fixed member for branching the flow path of the game ball and rolling the game ball toward the winning opening is provided, and by the branch portion, The game ball is branched into a first flow path that can flow through the winning port and a second flow path that does not flow through the winning port.
Through the cover portion, it is possible to visually recognize a game ball circulating on the board surface side of the cover portion,
No game nail is provided on the board surface side of the cover part, and the distribution of the game balls is guided only by the distribution guide means.
When the game ball that has reached the inclined surface of the branching part rolls on the inclined surface toward the winning opening, the opening member is always closed to the winning opening when the opening and closing member is in the closed state. If it is not accepted and the opening and closing member is in the open state, it is always guided to the winning opening,
The entrance width of the second flow path branched by the branch portion is a width that allows only one game ball to pass through, and can be distributed to the winning opening rather than the entrance width of the second flow path that does not flow to the winning opening. The inlet width of the first flow path is formed larger,
The branch portion is a "ball flow that allows a game ball to flow down on the right side of a center character provided at an upstream side of the branch portion with a width that allows only one game ball to flow down, and which is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game board. A gaming machine characterized by branching a game ball flowing down a "road" into the first flow path or the second flow path.

Images